]> gcc.gnu.org Git - gcc.git/blob - gcc/tm.texi
rtl.c: Define CONST_DOUBLE_FORMAT to the appropriate format for a CONST_DOUBLE...
[gcc.git] / gcc / tm.texi
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988,89,92,93,94,96,97,98,1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h}. This header file defines numerous macros
15 that convey the information about the target machine that does not fit
16 into the scheme of the @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be
17 a link to @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h}
18 includes @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include
19 @file{config.h}.
20
21 @menu
22 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
23 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}.
24 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
25 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
26 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
27 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
28 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
29 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
30 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
31 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
32 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
33 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
34 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
35 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
36 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
37 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
38 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
39 * Cross-compilation:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
40 * Misc:: Everything else.
41 @end menu
42
43 @node Driver
44 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
45 @cindex driver
46 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
47
48 @c prevent bad page break with this line
49 You can control the compilation driver.
50
51 @table @code
52 @findex SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
53 @item SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{char})
54 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
55 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
56 option takes--zero, for many options.
57
58 By default, this macro is defined as
59 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
60 properly. You need not define @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
61 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
62 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
63 additional options.
64
65 @findex WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG
66 @item WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG (@var{name})
67 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{name}}
68 takes arguments. The value should be the number of arguments that
69 option takes--zero, for many options. This macro rather than
70 @code{SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} is used for multi-character option names.
71
72 By default, this macro is defined as
73 @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG}, which handles the standard options
74 properly. You need not define @code{WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} unless you
75 wish to add additional options which take arguments. Any redefinition
76 should call @code{DEFAULT_WORD_SWITCH_TAKES_ARG} and then check for
77 additional options.
78
79 @findex SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION
80 @item SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION (@var{char})
81 A C expression which determines whether the option @samp{-@var{char}}
82 stops compilation before the generation of an executable. The value is
83 boolean, non-zero if the option does stop an executable from being
84 generated, zero otherwise.
85
86 By default, this macro is defined as
87 @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION}, which handles the standard
88 options properly. You need not define
89 @code{SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} unless you wish to add additional
90 options which affect the generation of an executable. Any redefinition
91 should call @code{DEFAULT_SWITCH_CURTAILS_COMPILATION} and then check
92 for additional options.
93
94 @findex SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
95 @item SWITCHES_NEED_SPACES
96 A string-valued C expression which enumerates the options for which
97 the linker needs a space between the option and its argument.
98
99 If this macro is not defined, the default value is @code{""}.
100
101 @findex CPP_SPEC
102 @item CPP_SPEC
103 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
104 pass to CPP. It can also specify how to translate options you
105 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP.
106
107 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
108
109 @findex NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
110 @item NO_BUILTIN_SIZE_TYPE
111 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
112 @code{__SIZE_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__SIZE_TYPE__} must then be defined
113 by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
114
115 This should be defined if @code{SIZE_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
116 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
117 be defined.
118
119 @findex NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
120 @item NO_BUILTIN_PTRDIFF_TYPE
121 If this macro is defined, the preprocessor will not define the builtin macro
122 @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__}. The macro @code{__PTRDIFF_TYPE__} must then be
123 defined by @code{CPP_SPEC} instead.
124
125 This should be defined if @code{PTRDIFF_TYPE} depends on target dependent flags
126 which are not accessible to the preprocessor. Otherwise, it should not
127 be defined.
128
129 @findex SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
130 @item SIGNED_CHAR_SPEC
131 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
132 pass to CPP. By default, this macro is defined to pass the option
133 @samp{-D__CHAR_UNSIGNED__} to CPP if @code{char} will be treated as
134 @code{unsigned char} by @code{cc1}.
135
136 Do not define this macro unless you need to override the default
137 definition.
138
139 @findex CC1_SPEC
140 @item CC1_SPEC
141 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
142 pass to @code{cc1, cc1plus, f771, and the other language front ends}.
143 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
144 for GCC to pass to front ends..
145
146 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
147
148 @findex CC1PLUS_SPEC
149 @item CC1PLUS_SPEC
150 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
151 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
152 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
153
154 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
155
156 @findex ASM_SPEC
157 @item ASM_SPEC
158 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
159 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
160 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
161 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
162
163 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
164
165 @findex ASM_FINAL_SPEC
166 @item ASM_FINAL_SPEC
167 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
168 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
169 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
170 an example of this.
171
172 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
173
174 @findex LINK_SPEC
175 @item LINK_SPEC
176 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
177 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
178 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
179
180 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
181
182 @findex LIB_SPEC
183 @item LIB_SPEC
184 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
185 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
186 command given to the linker.
187
188 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
189 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
190
191 @findex LIBGCC_SPEC
192 @item LIBGCC_SPEC
193 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
194 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
195 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
196 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
197
198 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
199 passes the string @samp{-lgcc} to the linker unless the @samp{-shared}
200 option is specified.
201
202 @findex STARTFILE_SPEC
203 @item STARTFILE_SPEC
204 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
205 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
206 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
207
208 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
209 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
210
211 @findex ENDFILE_SPEC
212 @item ENDFILE_SPEC
213 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
214 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
215 the very end of the command given to the linker.
216
217 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
218
219 @findex EXTRA_SPECS
220 @item EXTRA_SPECS
221 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
222 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
223 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
224
225 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
226 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
227 string constant that provides the specification.
228
229 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
230
231 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
232 related targets, which have various @code{..._SPECS} which are similar
233 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
234 these definitions.
235
236 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
237 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
238 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
239 used.
240
241 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
242
243 @example
244 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
245 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
246
247 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
248 @end example
249
250 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
251 @smallexample
252 #undef CPP_SPEC
253 #define CPP_SPEC \
254 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
255 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} %@{mcall-aix: -D_CALL_AIX @} \
256 %@{!mcall-sysv: %@{!mcall-aix: %(cpp_sysv_default) @}@} \
257 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
258
259 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
260 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
261 @end smallexample
262
263 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
264 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
265
266 @smallexample
267 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
268 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
269 @end smallexample
270
271 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
272 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL
273 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
274 @file{libgcc.a} itself and should not pass @samp{-L} options to the
275 linker. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
276 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search and will
277 pass @samp{-L} options to it.
278
279 @findex LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
280 @item LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
281 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
282 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
283 the argument @samp{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
284 This macro is similar to @code{LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL}, except that it does
285 not affect @samp{-L} options.
286
287 @findex LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
288 @item LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
289 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
290 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
291 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
292 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
293 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
294 the effect you need.
295
296 @findex MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
297 @item MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
298 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
299 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
300 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
301 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
302
303 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
304 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
305 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
306 @xref{Target Fragment}.
307
308 @findex RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
309 @item RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
310 Define this macro to tell @code{gcc} that it should only translate
311 a @samp{-B} prefix into a @samp{-L} linker option if the prefix
312 indicates an absolute file name.
313
314 @findex STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
315 @item STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX
316 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
317 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/gcc-lib/} as the default prefix to
318 try when searching for the executable files of the compiler.
319
320 @findex MD_EXEC_PREFIX
321 @item MD_EXEC_PREFIX
322 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
323 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
324 when the @samp{-b} option is used, or the compiler is built as a cross
325 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
326 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
327
328 @findex STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
329 @item STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
330 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
331 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/lib/} as the default prefix to
332 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
333
334 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
335 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
336 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
337 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
338 @samp{-b} option is used, or when the compiler is built as a cross
339 compiler.
340
341 @findex MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
342 @item MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
343 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
344 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the @samp{-b} option is
345 used, or when the compiler is built as a cross compiler.
346
347 @findex INIT_ENVIRONMENT
348 @item INIT_ENVIRONMENT
349 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
350 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
351 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
352 initialize the necessary environment variables.
353
354 @findex LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
355 @item LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
356 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
357 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
358 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
359 comes before @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
360
361 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
362 @file{/usr/local/include} or its replacement.
363
364 @findex SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
365 @item SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR
366 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to specify a
367 system-specific directory to search for header files before the standard
368 directory. @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR} comes before
369 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR} in the search order.
370
371 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search the directory
372 specified.
373
374 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
375 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR
376 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
377 standard choice of @file{/usr/include} as the default prefix to
378 try when searching for header files.
379
380 Cross compilers do not use this macro and do not search either
381 @file{/usr/include} or its replacement.
382
383 @findex STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
384 @item STANDARD_INCLUDE_COMPONENT
385 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}.
386 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
387 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
388
389 @findex INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
390 @item INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
391 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
392 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
393 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
394 @code{SYSTEM_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
395 @code{STANDARD_INCLUDE_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
396 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
397 and specify private search areas for GCC. The directory
398 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
399
400 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
401 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
402 string constant), the component name, and flag for C++-only directories,
403 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
404 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
405 the array with a null element.
406
407 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
408 if any, in all upper-case letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
409 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of the a vendor-supplied
410 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
411
412
413 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
414
415 @example
416 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
417 @{ \
418 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
419 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
420 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
421 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
422 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
423 @}
424 @end example
425 @end table
426
427 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
428
429 @enumerate
430 @item
431 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
432
433 @item
434 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
435
436 @item
437 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
438
439 @item
440 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
441
442 @item
443 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
444
445 @item
446 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
447 @end enumerate
448
449 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
450
451 @enumerate
452 @item
453 Any prefixes specified by the user with @samp{-B}.
454
455 @item
456 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
457
458 @item
459 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
460 (native only, cross compilers do not use this).
461
462 @item
463 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}.
464
465 @item
466 @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}.
467
468 @item
469 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if any.
470
471 @item
472 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if any.
473
474 @item
475 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}.
476
477 @item
478 @file{/lib/}.
479
480 @item
481 @file{/usr/lib/}.
482 @end enumerate
483
484 @node Run-time Target
485 @section Run-time Target Specification
486 @cindex run-time target specification
487 @cindex predefined macros
488 @cindex target specifications
489
490 @c prevent bad page break with this line
491 Here are run-time target specifications.
492
493 @table @code
494 @findex CPP_PREDEFINES
495 @item CPP_PREDEFINES
496 Define this to be a string constant containing @samp{-D} options to
497 define the predefined macros that identify this machine and system.
498 These macros will be predefined unless the @samp{-ansi} option is
499 specified.
500
501 In addition, a parallel set of macros are predefined, whose names are
502 made by appending @samp{__} at the beginning and at the end. These
503 @samp{__} macros are permitted by the ANSI standard, so they are
504 predefined regardless of whether @samp{-ansi} is specified.
505
506 For example, on the Sun, one can use the following value:
507
508 @smallexample
509 "-Dmc68000 -Dsun -Dunix"
510 @end smallexample
511
512 The result is to define the macros @code{__mc68000__}, @code{__sun__}
513 and @code{__unix__} unconditionally, and the macros @code{mc68000},
514 @code{sun} and @code{unix} provided @samp{-ansi} is not specified.
515
516 @findex extern int target_flags
517 @item extern int target_flags;
518 This declaration should be present.
519
520 @cindex optional hardware or system features
521 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
522 @item TARGET_@dots{}
523 This series of macros is to allow compiler command arguments to
524 enable or disable the use of optional features of the target machine.
525 For example, one machine description serves both the 68000 and
526 the 68020; a command argument tells the compiler whether it should
527 use 68020-only instructions or not. This command argument works
528 by means of a macro @code{TARGET_68020} that tests a bit in
529 @code{target_flags}.
530
531 Define a macro @code{TARGET_@var{featurename}} for each such option.
532 Its definition should test a bit in @code{target_flags}; for example:
533
534 @smallexample
535 #define TARGET_68020 (target_flags & 1)
536 @end smallexample
537
538 One place where these macros are used is in the condition-expressions
539 of instruction patterns. Note how @code{TARGET_68020} appears
540 frequently in the 68000 machine description file, @file{m68k.md}.
541 Another place they are used is in the definitions of the other
542 macros in the @file{@var{machine}.h} file.
543
544 @findex TARGET_SWITCHES
545 @item TARGET_SWITCHES
546 This macro defines names of command options to set and clear
547 bits in @code{target_flags}. Its definition is an initializer
548 with a subgrouping for each command option.
549
550 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the option
551 name, a number, which contains the bits to set in
552 @code{target_flags}, and a second string which is the description
553 displayed by --help. If the number is negative then the bits specified
554 by the number are cleared instead of being set. If the description
555 string is present but empty, then no help information will be displayed
556 for that option, but it will not count as an undocumented option. The
557 actual option name is made by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
558
559 One of the subgroupings should have a null string. The number in
560 this grouping is the default value for @code{target_flags}. Any
561 target options act starting with that value.
562
563 Here is an example which defines @samp{-m68000} and @samp{-m68020}
564 with opposite meanings, and picks the latter as the default:
565
566 @smallexample
567 #define TARGET_SWITCHES \
568 @{ @{ "68020", 1, "" @}, \
569 @{ "68000", -1, "Compile for the 68000" @}, \
570 @{ "", 1, "" @}@}
571 @end smallexample
572
573 @findex TARGET_OPTIONS
574 @item TARGET_OPTIONS
575 This macro is similar to @code{TARGET_SWITCHES} but defines names of command
576 options that have values. Its definition is an initializer with a
577 subgrouping for each command option.
578
579 Each subgrouping contains a string constant, that defines the fixed part
580 of the option name, the address of a variable, and a description string.
581 The variable, type @code{char *}, is set to the variable part of the
582 given option if the fixed part matches. The actual option name is made
583 by appending @samp{-m} to the specified name.
584
585 Here is an example which defines @samp{-mshort-data-@var{number}}. If the
586 given option is @samp{-mshort-data-512}, the variable @code{m88k_short_data}
587 will be set to the string @code{"512"}.
588
589 @smallexample
590 extern char *m88k_short_data;
591 #define TARGET_OPTIONS \
592 @{ @{ "short-data-", &m88k_short_data, "Specify the size of the short data section" @} @}
593 @end smallexample
594
595 @findex TARGET_VERSION
596 @item TARGET_VERSION
597 This macro is a C statement to print on @code{stderr} a string
598 describing the particular machine description choice. Every machine
599 description should define @code{TARGET_VERSION}. For example:
600
601 @smallexample
602 #ifdef MOTOROLA
603 #define TARGET_VERSION \
604 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, Motorola syntax)");
605 #else
606 #define TARGET_VERSION \
607 fprintf (stderr, " (68k, MIT syntax)");
608 #endif
609 @end smallexample
610
611 @findex OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
612 @item OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
613 Sometimes certain combinations of command options do not make sense on
614 a particular target machine. You can define a macro
615 @code{OVERRIDE_OPTIONS} to take account of this. This macro, if
616 defined, is executed once just after all the command options have been
617 parsed.
618
619 Don't use this macro to turn on various extra optimizations for
620 @samp{-O}. That is what @code{OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS} is for.
621
622 @findex OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS
623 @item OPTIMIZATION_OPTIONS (@var{level}, @var{size})
624 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
625 various optimization levels. This macro, if defined, is executed once
626 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
627 of the command options have been parsed. Values set in this macro are
628 used as the default values for the other command line options.
629
630 @var{level} is the optimization level specified; 2 if @samp{-O2} is
631 specified, 1 if @samp{-O} is specified, and 0 if neither is specified.
632
633 @var{size} is non-zero if @samp{-Os} is specified and zero otherwise.
634
635 You should not use this macro to change options that are not
636 machine-specific. These should uniformly selected by the same
637 optimization level on all supported machines. Use this macro to enable
638 machine-specific optimizations.
639
640 @strong{Do not examine @code{write_symbols} in
641 this macro!} The debugging options are not supposed to alter the
642 generated code.
643
644 @findex CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
645 @item CAN_DEBUG_WITHOUT_FP
646 Define this macro if debugging can be performed even without a frame
647 pointer. If this macro is defined, GCC will turn on the
648 @samp{-fomit-frame-pointer} option whenever @samp{-O} is specified.
649 @end table
650
651 @node Storage Layout
652 @section Storage Layout
653 @cindex storage layout
654
655 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
656 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
657 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
658 @xref{Run-time Target}.
659
660 @table @code
661 @findex BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
662 @item BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
663 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
664 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
665 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
666 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
667 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
668 macro need not be a constant.
669
670 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
671 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
672
673 @findex BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
674 @item BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
675 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
676 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
677
678 @findex WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
679 @item WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
680 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
681 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
682 memory locations and registers; GCC fundamentally assumes that the
683 order of words in memory is the same as the order in registers. This
684 macro need not be a constant.
685
686 @findex LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
687 @item LIBGCC2_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
688 Define this macro if WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN is not constant. This must be a
689 constant value with the same meaning as WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN, which will be
690 used only when compiling libgcc2.c. Typically the value will be set
691 based on preprocessor defines.
692
693 @findex FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
694 @item FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
695 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
696 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
697 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
698 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
699
700 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
701 multi-word integers.
702
703 @findex BITS_PER_UNIT
704 @item BITS_PER_UNIT
705 Define this macro to be the number of bits in an addressable storage
706 unit (byte); normally 8.
707
708 @findex BITS_PER_WORD
709 @item BITS_PER_WORD
710 Number of bits in a word; normally 32.
711
712 @findex MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
713 @item MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
714 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
715 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
716 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
717
718 @findex UNITS_PER_WORD
719 @item UNITS_PER_WORD
720 Number of storage units in a word; normally 4.
721
722 @findex MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
723 @item MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
724 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
725 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
726 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
727
728 @findex POINTER_SIZE
729 @item POINTER_SIZE
730 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
731 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
732 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}.
733
734 @findex POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
735 @item POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
736 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pointers that need to be
737 extended from being @code{POINTER_SIZE} bits wide to @code{Pmode} are to
738 be zero-extended and zero if they are to be sign-extended.
739
740 You need not define this macro if the @code{POINTER_SIZE} is equal
741 to the width of @code{Pmode}.
742
743 @findex PROMOTE_MODE
744 @item PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
745 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
746 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
747 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
748 scalar type.
749
750 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
751 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
752 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
753 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
754 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
755 counterparts.
756
757 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
758 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
759 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
760 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
761 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
762 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
763
764 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
765
766 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
767 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS
768 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
769 should also be done for outgoing function arguments.
770
771 @findex PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
772 @item PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN
773 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
774 should also be done for the return value of functions.
775
776 If this macro is defined, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} must perform the same
777 promotions done by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}.
778
779 @findex PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
780 @item PROMOTE_FOR_CALL_ONLY
781 Define this macro if the promotion described by @code{PROMOTE_MODE}
782 should @emph{only} be performed for outgoing function arguments or
783 function return values, as specified by @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_ARGS}
784 and @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN}, respectively.
785
786 @findex PARM_BOUNDARY
787 @item PARM_BOUNDARY
788 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
789 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
790 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
791 size of an integer.
792
793 @findex STACK_BOUNDARY
794 @item STACK_BOUNDARY
795 Define this macro if there is a guaranteed alignment for the stack
796 pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression
797 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a
798 default if PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY is not defined.
799
800 @findex PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
801 @item PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
802 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for
803 the stack pointer. The definition is a C expression
804 for the desired alignment (measured in bits). If STACK_BOUNDARY is
805 also defined, this macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger
806 than STACK_BOUNDARY.
807
808 @cindex @code{PUSH_ROUNDING}, interaction with @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}
809 If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is not defined, the stack will always be aligned
810 to the specified boundary. If @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} is defined and specifies
811 a less strict alignment than @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, the stack may
812 be momentarily unaligned while pushing arguments.
813
814 @findex FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
815 @item FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
816 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
817
818 @findex BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
819 @item BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
820 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in bits.
821
822 @findex MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
823 @item MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
824 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
825 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
826 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
827 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
828
829 @findex BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
830 @item BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
831 Biggest alignment that any structure field can require on this machine,
832 in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
833 structure fields only.
834
835 @findex ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN
836 @item ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
837 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
838 alignment computed in the usual way is @var{computed}. GCC uses
839 this value instead of the value in @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} or
840 @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT}, if defined, for structure fields only.
841
842 @findex MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
843 @item MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
844 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
845 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
846 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
847 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
848
849 @findex DATA_ALIGNMENT
850 @item DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
851 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
852 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
853 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
854 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
855
856 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
857
858 @findex strcpy
859 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
860 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
861 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
862 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
863
864 @findex CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT
865 @item CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
866 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
867 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
868 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
869 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
870 align the object.
871
872 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
873
874 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
875 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
876 constants can be done inline.
877
878 @findex LOCAL_ALIGNMENT
879 @item LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
880 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variables in
881 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
882 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
883 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
884
885 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
886
887 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
888 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
889
890 @findex EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
891 @item EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
892 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit field that follows an
893 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
894
895 Note that @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} also affects the alignment
896 that results from an empty field.
897
898 @findex STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
899 @item STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
900 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
901 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
902
903 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
904 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
905
906 @findex STRICT_ALIGNMENT
907 @item STRICT_ALIGNMENT
908 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
909 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
910 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
911
912 @findex PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
913 @item PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
914 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
915 alignment of bitfields and the structures that contain them.
916
917 The behavior is that the type written for a bitfield (@code{int},
918 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the
919 entire structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary
920 field of that type. In addition, the bitfield is placed within the
921 structure so that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a
922 boundary for it.
923
924 Thus, on most machines, a bitfield whose type is written as @code{int}
925 would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force four-byte
926 alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may not be four
927 bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
928
929 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
930 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
931
932 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
933 bitfields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
934 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
935 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
936
937 The other known way of making bitfields work is to define
938 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
939 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
940
941 Unless the machine has bitfield instructions or you define
942 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
943 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
944
945 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
946 bitfields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
947 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
948
949 @example
950 struct foo1
951 @{
952 char x;
953 char :0;
954 char y;
955 @};
956
957 struct foo2
958 @{
959 char x;
960 int :0;
961 char y;
962 @};
963
964 main ()
965 @{
966 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
967 sizeof (struct foo1));
968 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
969 sizeof (struct foo2));
970 exit (0);
971 @}
972 @end example
973
974 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
975 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
976
977 @findex BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
978 @item BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
979 Like PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS except that its effect is limited to
980 aligning a bitfield within the structure.
981
982 @findex ROUND_TYPE_SIZE
983 @item ROUND_TYPE_SIZE (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
984 Define this macro as an expression for the overall size of a type
985 (given by @var{type} as a tree node) when the size computed in the
986 usual way is @var{computed} and the alignment is @var{specified}.
987
988 The default is to round @var{computed} up to a multiple of @var{specified}.
989
990 @findex ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN
991 @item ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
992 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
993 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
994 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
995 @var{specified}.
996
997 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
998 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
999
1000 @findex MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1001 @item MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1002 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1003 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1004 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1005 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1006 (DImode)} is assumed.
1007
1008 @findex STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE
1009 @item STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1010 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1011 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1012 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1013 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1014 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1015 having its mode specified.
1016
1017 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1018 would most commonly define this macro if the
1019 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1020 64-bit mode.
1021
1022 @findex STACK_SIZE_MODE
1023 @item STACK_SIZE_MODE
1024 If defined, an expression of type @code{enum machine_mode} that
1025 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1026 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1027
1028 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1029 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1030 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1031
1032 @findex CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE
1033 @item CHECK_FLOAT_VALUE (@var{mode}, @var{value}, @var{overflow})
1034 A C statement to validate the value @var{value} (of type
1035 @code{double}) for mode @var{mode}. This means that you check whether
1036 @var{value} fits within the possible range of values for mode
1037 @var{mode} on this target machine. The mode @var{mode} is always
1038 a mode of class @code{MODE_FLOAT}. @var{overflow} is nonzero if
1039 the value is already known to be out of range.
1040
1041 If @var{value} is not valid or if @var{overflow} is nonzero, you should
1042 set @var{overflow} to 1 and then assign some valid value to @var{value}.
1043 Allowing an invalid value to go through the compiler can produce
1044 incorrect assembler code which may even cause Unix assemblers to crash.
1045
1046 This macro need not be defined if there is no work for it to do.
1047
1048 @findex TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1049 @item TARGET_FLOAT_FORMAT
1050 A code distinguishing the floating point format of the target machine.
1051 There are three defined values:
1052
1053 @table @code
1054 @findex IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1055 @item IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT
1056 This code indicates IEEE floating point. It is the default; there is no
1057 need to define this macro when the format is IEEE.
1058
1059 @findex VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1060 @item VAX_FLOAT_FORMAT
1061 This code indicates the peculiar format used on the Vax.
1062
1063 @findex UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1064 @item UNKNOWN_FLOAT_FORMAT
1065 This code indicates any other format.
1066 @end table
1067
1068 The value of this macro is compared with @code{HOST_FLOAT_FORMAT}
1069 (@pxref{Config}) to determine whether the target machine has the same
1070 format as the host machine. If any other formats are actually in use on
1071 supported machines, new codes should be defined for them.
1072
1073 The ordering of the component words of floating point values stored in
1074 memory is controlled by @code{FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the target
1075 machine and @code{HOST_FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} for the host.
1076
1077 @findex DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1078 @item DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS
1079 GCC supports two ways of implementing C++ vtables: traditional or with
1080 so-called ``thunks''. The flag @samp{-fvtable-thunk} chooses between them.
1081 Define this macro to be a C expression for the default value of that flag.
1082 If @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} is 0, GCC uses the traditional
1083 implementation by default. The ``thunk'' implementation is more efficient
1084 (especially if you have provided an implementation of
1085 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK}, see @ref{Function Entry}), but is not binary
1086 compatible with code compiled using the traditional implementation.
1087 If you are writing a new ports, define @code{DEFAULT_VTABLE_THUNKS} to 1.
1088
1089 If you do not define this macro, the default for @samp{-fvtable-thunk} is 0.
1090 @end table
1091
1092 @node Type Layout
1093 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1094
1095 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1096 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1097 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1098 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1099
1100 @table @code
1101 @findex INT_TYPE_SIZE
1102 @item INT_TYPE_SIZE
1103 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1104 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1105
1106 @findex MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1107 @item MAX_INT_TYPE_SIZE
1108 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the target
1109 machine. If this is undefined, the default is @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE}.
1110 Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the largest value that
1111 @code{INT_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is used in @code{cpp}.
1112
1113 @findex SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1114 @item SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1115 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1116 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1117 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1118 unit.)
1119
1120 @findex LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1121 @item LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1122 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1123 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1124
1125 @findex MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1126 @item MAX_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1127 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1128 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1129 @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1130 largest value that @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1131 used in @code{cpp}.
1132
1133 @findex LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1134 @item LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1135 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1136 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1137 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of
1138 macro must be at least 64.
1139
1140 @findex CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1141 @item CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1142 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1143 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one quarter
1144 of a word. (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up
1145 to one unit.)
1146
1147 @findex MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1148 @item MAX_CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1149 Maximum number for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1150 target machine. If this is undefined, the default is
1151 @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1152 largest value that @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1153 used in @code{cpp}.
1154
1155 @findex FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1156 @item FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1157 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1158 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1159
1160 @findex DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1161 @item DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1162 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1163 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1164 words.
1165
1166 @findex LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1167 @item LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1168 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1169 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1170 words.
1171
1172 @findex WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1173 @item WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1174 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1175 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1176 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1177 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1178 is the default.
1179
1180 @findex DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1181 @item DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1182 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1183 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1184 always override this default with the options @samp{-fsigned-char}
1185 and @samp{-funsigned-char}.
1186
1187 @findex DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1188 @item DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1189 A C expression to determine whether to give an @code{enum} type
1190 only as many bytes as it takes to represent the range of possible values
1191 of that type. A nonzero value means to do that; a zero value means all
1192 @code{enum} types should be allocated like @code{int}.
1193
1194 If you don't define the macro, the default is 0.
1195
1196 @findex SIZE_TYPE
1197 @item SIZE_TYPE
1198 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1199 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1200 contents of the string.
1201
1202 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1203 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1204 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1205 of the data type names defined in the function
1206 @code{init_decl_processing} in the file @file{c-decl.c}. You may not
1207 omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the compiler to
1208 crash on startup.
1209
1210 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1211 int"}.
1212
1213 @findex PTRDIFF_TYPE
1214 @item PTRDIFF_TYPE
1215 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1216 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1217 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1218 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1219
1220 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1221
1222 @findex WCHAR_TYPE
1223 @item WCHAR_TYPE
1224 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1225 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1226 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1227 information.
1228
1229 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1230
1231 @findex WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1232 @item WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1233 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1234 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1235 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1236
1237 @findex MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1238 @item MAX_WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1239 Maximum number for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1240 characters. If this is undefined, the default is
1241 @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
1242 largest value that @code{WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE} can have at run-time. This is
1243 used in @code{cpp}.
1244
1245 @findex OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1246 @item OBJC_INT_SELECTORS
1247 Define this macro if the type of Objective C selectors should be
1248 @code{int}.
1249
1250 If this macro is not defined, then selectors should have the type
1251 @code{struct objc_selector *}.
1252
1253 @findex OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1254 @item OBJC_SELECTORS_WITHOUT_LABELS
1255 Define this macro if the compiler can group all the selectors together
1256 into a vector and use just one label at the beginning of the vector.
1257 Otherwise, the compiler must give each selector its own assembler
1258 label.
1259
1260 On certain machines, it is important to have a separate label for each
1261 selector because this enables the linker to eliminate duplicate selectors.
1262
1263 @findex TARGET_BELL
1264 @item TARGET_BELL
1265 A C constant expression for the integer value for escape sequence
1266 @samp{\a}.
1267
1268 @findex TARGET_TAB
1269 @findex TARGET_BS
1270 @findex TARGET_NEWLINE
1271 @item TARGET_BS
1272 @itemx TARGET_TAB
1273 @itemx TARGET_NEWLINE
1274 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1275 @samp{\b}, @samp{\t} and @samp{\n}.
1276
1277 @findex TARGET_VT
1278 @findex TARGET_FF
1279 @findex TARGET_CR
1280 @item TARGET_VT
1281 @itemx TARGET_FF
1282 @itemx TARGET_CR
1283 C constant expressions for the integer values for escape sequences
1284 @samp{\v}, @samp{\f} and @samp{\r}.
1285 @end table
1286
1287 @node Registers
1288 @section Register Usage
1289 @cindex register usage
1290
1291 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1292 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1293
1294 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1295 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1296 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1297 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1298 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1299
1300 @menu
1301 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1302 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1303 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1304 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1305 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1306 * Obsolete Register Macros:: Macros formerly used for the 80387.
1307 @end menu
1308
1309 @node Register Basics
1310 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1311
1312 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1313 Registers have various characteristics.
1314
1315 @table @code
1316 @findex FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1317 @item FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1318 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1319 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1320 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1321 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1322
1323 @item FIXED_REGISTERS
1324 @findex FIXED_REGISTERS
1325 @cindex fixed register
1326 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1327 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1328 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1329 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1330 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1331 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1332 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1333
1334 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1335 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1336 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1337
1338 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1339 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1340 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1341 the user with the command options @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1342 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1343
1344 @findex CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1345 @item CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1346 @cindex call-used register
1347 @cindex call-clobbered register
1348 @cindex call-saved register
1349 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1350 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1351 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1352 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1353 function calls.
1354
1355 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1356 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1357 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1358
1359 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED
1360 @item HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1361 @cindex call-used register
1362 @cindex call-clobbered register
1363 @cindex call-saved register
1364 A C expression that is non-zero if it is not permissible to store a
1365 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1366 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1367 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1368 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1369
1370 @findex CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1371 @findex fixed_regs
1372 @findex call_used_regs
1373 @item CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1374 Zero or more C statements that may conditionally modify four variables
1375 @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}, @code{global_regs}
1376 (these three are of type @code{char []}) and @code{reg_class_contents}
1377 (of type @code{HARD_REG_SET}).
1378 Before the macro is called @code{fixed_regs}, @code{call_used_regs}
1379 and @code{reg_class_contents} have been initialized from
1380 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} and
1381 @code{REG_CLASS_CONTENTS}, respectively,
1382 @code{global_regs} has been cleared, and any @samp{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1383 @samp{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @samp{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}} command
1384 options have been applied.
1385
1386 This is necessary in case the fixed or call-clobbered registers depend
1387 on target flags.
1388
1389 You need not define this macro if it has no work to do.
1390
1391 @cindex disabling certain registers
1392 @cindex controlling register usage
1393 If the usage of an entire class of registers depends on the target
1394 flags, you may indicate this to GCC by using this macro to modify
1395 @code{fixed_regs} and @code{call_used_regs} to 1 for each of the
1396 registers in the classes which should not be used by GCC. Also define
1397 the macro @code{REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER} to return @code{NO_REGS} if it
1398 is called with a letter for a class that shouldn't be used.
1399
1400 (However, if this class is not included in @code{GENERAL_REGS} and all
1401 of the insn patterns whose constraints permit this class are
1402 controlled by target switches, then GCC will automatically avoid using
1403 these registers when the target switches are opposed to them.)
1404
1405 @findex NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1406 @item NON_SAVING_SETJMP
1407 If this macro is defined and has a nonzero value, it means that
1408 @code{setjmp} and related functions fail to save the registers, or that
1409 @code{longjmp} fails to restore them. To compensate, the compiler
1410 avoids putting variables in registers in functions that use
1411 @code{setjmp}.
1412
1413 @findex INCOMING_REGNO
1414 @item INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1415 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1416 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1417 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1418 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1419 outbound register.
1420
1421 @findex OUTGOING_REGNO
1422 @item OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1423 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1424 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1425 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1426 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1427 register.
1428
1429 @ignore
1430 @findex PC_REGNUM
1431 @item PC_REGNUM
1432 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1433 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1434 @end ignore
1435 @end table
1436
1437 @node Allocation Order
1438 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1439 @cindex order of register allocation
1440 @cindex register allocation order
1441
1442 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1443 Registers are allocated in order.
1444
1445 @table @code
1446 @findex REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1447 @item REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1448 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1449 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1450 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1451
1452 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1453 (all else being equal).
1454
1455 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1456 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1457 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1458 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1459 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1460
1461 @findex ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1462 @item ORDER_REGS_FOR_LOCAL_ALLOC
1463 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1464 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1465
1466 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1467 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1468 register; and so on.
1469
1470 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1471 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1472
1473 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1474 @end table
1475
1476 @node Values in Registers
1477 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1478
1479 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1480 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1481 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1482
1483 @table @code
1484 @findex HARD_REGNO_NREGS
1485 @item HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1486 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1487 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1488 @var{mode}.
1489
1490 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1491 definition of this macro is
1492
1493 @smallexample
1494 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1495 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1496 / UNITS_PER_WORD))
1497 @end smallexample
1498
1499 @findex ALTER_HARD_SUBREG
1500 @item ALTER_HARD_SUBREG (@var{tgt_mode}, @var{word}, @var{src_mode}, @var{regno})
1501 A C expression that returns an adjusted hard register number for
1502
1503 @smallexample
1504 (subreg:@var{tgt_mode} (reg:@var{src_mode} @var{regno}) @var{word})
1505 @end smallexample
1506
1507 This may be needed if the target machine has mixed sized big-endian
1508 registers, like Sparc v9.
1509
1510 @findex HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1511 @item HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1512 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1513 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1514 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1515 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1516
1517 @smallexample
1518 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1519 @end smallexample
1520
1521 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1522 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1523
1524 @cindex register pairs
1525 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1526 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1527 odd register numbers for such modes.
1528
1529 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1530 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1531 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1532 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1533
1534 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1535 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1536 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1537 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1538 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1539 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1540 to be tieable.
1541
1542 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1543 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1544 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1545 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1546 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1547 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1548
1549 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1550 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1551 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1552 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1553 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1554 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1555 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1556 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1557 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1558
1559 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1560 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1561 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1562 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1563 constraints for those instructions.
1564
1565 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1566 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1567 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1568 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1569 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1570
1571 @findex MODES_TIEABLE_P
1572 @item MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1573 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1574 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1575
1576 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1577 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1578 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1579 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1580 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1581 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1582
1583 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1584 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1585 allocation.
1586
1587 @findex AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1588 @item AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1589 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1590 registers. You should only define this macro if support fo copying to/from
1591 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1592 @end table
1593
1594 @node Leaf Functions
1595 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1596
1597 @cindex leaf functions
1598 @cindex functions, leaf
1599 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1600 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1601 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1602 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1603 normally arrive.
1604
1605 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1606 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1607 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1608 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1609 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1610 functions''.
1611
1612 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1613 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1614 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1615 accomplish this.
1616
1617 @table @code
1618 @findex LEAF_REGISTERS
1619 @item LEAF_REGISTERS
1620 A C initializer for a vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1621 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1622 function treatment.
1623
1624 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1625 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1626 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1627 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1628 in this vector.
1629
1630 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1631 the treatment of leaf functions.
1632
1633 @findex LEAF_REG_REMAP
1634 @item LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1635 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1636 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1637
1638 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
1639 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield -1, which
1640 will cause the compiler to abort.
1641
1642 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
1643 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
1644 this.
1645 @end table
1646
1647 @findex current_function_is_leaf
1648 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
1649 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
1650 treat leaf functions specially. They can test the C variable
1651 @code{current_function_is_leaf} which is nonzero for leaf functions.
1652 @code{current_function_is_leaf} is set prior to local register allocation
1653 and is valid for the remaining compiler passes. They can also test the C
1654 variable @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for
1655 leaf functions which only use leaf registers.
1656 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after reload and is
1657 only useful if @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
1658 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
1659 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
1660
1661 @node Stack Registers
1662 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
1663
1664 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
1665 ``registers'' form a stack, as in the 80387 coprocessor for the 80386.
1666 Stack registers are normally written by pushing onto the stack, and are
1667 numbered relative to the top of the stack.
1668
1669 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
1670 they must be consecutively numbered.
1671
1672 @table @code
1673 @findex STACK_REGS
1674 @item STACK_REGS
1675 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
1676
1677 @findex FIRST_STACK_REG
1678 @item FIRST_STACK_REG
1679 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
1680 of the stack.
1681
1682 @findex LAST_STACK_REG
1683 @item LAST_STACK_REG
1684 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
1685 the stack.
1686 @end table
1687
1688 @node Obsolete Register Macros
1689 @subsection Obsolete Macros for Controlling Register Usage
1690
1691 These features do not work very well. They exist because they used to
1692 be required to generate correct code for the 80387 coprocessor of the
1693 80386. They are no longer used by that machine description and may be
1694 removed in a later version of the compiler. Don't use them!
1695
1696 @table @code
1697 @findex OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P
1698 @item OVERLAPPING_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
1699 If defined, this is a C expression whose value is nonzero if hard
1700 register number @var{regno} is an overlapping register. This means a
1701 hard register which overlaps a hard register with a different number.
1702 (Such overlap is undesirable, but occasionally it allows a machine to
1703 be supported which otherwise could not be.) This macro must return
1704 nonzero for @emph{all} the registers which overlap each other. GCC
1705 can use an overlapping register only in certain limited ways. It can
1706 be used for allocation within a basic block, and may be spilled for
1707 reloading; that is all.
1708
1709 If this macro is not defined, it means that none of the hard registers
1710 overlap each other. This is the usual situation.
1711
1712 @findex INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P
1713 @item INSN_CLOBBERS_REGNO_P (@var{insn}, @var{regno})
1714 If defined, this is a C expression whose value should be nonzero if
1715 the insn @var{insn} has the effect of mysteriously clobbering the
1716 contents of hard register number @var{regno}. By ``mysterious'' we
1717 mean that the insn's RTL expression doesn't describe such an effect.
1718
1719 If this macro is not defined, it means that no insn clobbers registers
1720 mysteriously. This is the usual situation; all else being equal,
1721 it is best for the RTL expression to show all the activity.
1722
1723 @end table
1724
1725 @node Register Classes
1726 @section Register Classes
1727 @cindex register class definitions
1728 @cindex class definitions, register
1729
1730 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
1731 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
1732 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
1733 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
1734
1735 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
1736 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
1737 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
1738
1739 @findex ALL_REGS
1740 @findex NO_REGS
1741 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
1742 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
1743 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
1744 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
1745
1746 @findex GENERAL_REGS
1747 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
1748 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
1749 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
1750 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
1751 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
1752
1753 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
1754 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
1755
1756 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
1757 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
1758 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
1759 them in operand constraints.
1760
1761 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
1762 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
1763 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
1764 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
1765 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code.
1766
1767 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
1768 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
1769 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
1770 in their union.
1771
1772 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
1773 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
1774 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
1775 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
1776 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
1777
1778 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
1779 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
1780 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
1781 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
1782 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
1783 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
1784 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
1785 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
1786 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
1787
1788 @table @code
1789 @findex enum reg_class
1790 @item enum reg_class
1791 An enumeral type that must be defined with all the register class names
1792 as enumeral values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
1793 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumeral value,
1794 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
1795 tells how many classes there are.
1796
1797 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
1798 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
1799 in many of the tables described below.
1800
1801 @findex N_REG_CLASSES
1802 @item N_REG_CLASSES
1803 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
1804
1805 @example
1806 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
1807 @end example
1808
1809 @findex REG_CLASS_NAMES
1810 @item REG_CLASS_NAMES
1811 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
1812 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
1813
1814 @findex REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1815 @item REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
1816 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
1817 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
1818 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
1819 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
1820
1821 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
1822 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
1823 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
1824 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
1825
1826 @findex REGNO_REG_CLASS
1827 @item REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
1828 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
1829 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
1830 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
1831 register.
1832
1833 @findex BASE_REG_CLASS
1834 @item BASE_REG_CLASS
1835 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1836 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
1837 which is the register value plus a displacement.
1838
1839 @findex INDEX_REG_CLASS
1840 @item INDEX_REG_CLASS
1841 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
1842 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
1843 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
1844 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
1845
1846 @findex REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER
1847 @item REG_CLASS_FROM_LETTER (@var{char})
1848 A C expression which defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
1849 letters for register classes. If @var{char} is such a letter, the
1850 value should be the register class corresponding to it. Otherwise,
1851 the value should be @code{NO_REGS}. The register letter @samp{r},
1852 corresponding to class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, will not be passed
1853 to this macro; you do not need to handle it.
1854
1855 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1856 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
1857 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1858 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses. It may be
1859 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1860 allocated such a hard register.
1861
1862 @findex REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
1863 @item REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
1864 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
1865 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
1866 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
1867 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
1868 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
1869 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
1870
1871 @findex REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
1872 @item REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
1873 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
1874 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
1875 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
1876 allocated such a hard register.
1877
1878 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
1879 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
1880 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
1881 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
1882 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
1883 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
1884 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
1885 only if neither labeling works.
1886
1887 @findex PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
1888 @item PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1889 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1890 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
1891 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
1892 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
1893 safe:
1894
1895 @example
1896 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
1897 @end example
1898
1899 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
1900 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
1901 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
1902 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
1903 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
1904
1905 If @var{x} is a @code{const_double}, by returning @code{NO_REGS}
1906 you can force @var{x} into a memory constant. This is useful on
1907 certain machines where immediate floating values cannot be loaded into
1908 certain kinds of registers.
1909
1910 @findex PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1911 @item PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
1912 Like @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, but for output reloads instead of
1913 input reloads. If you don't define this macro, the default is to use
1914 @var{class}, unchanged.
1915
1916 @findex LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS
1917 @item LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
1918 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
1919 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
1920 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
1921 ordinarily be used.
1922
1923 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
1924 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
1925
1926 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
1927 smaller class.
1928
1929 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
1930 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
1931
1932 @findex SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS
1933 @findex SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1934 @findex SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
1935 @item SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1936 @itemx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1937 @itemx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
1938 Many machines have some registers that cannot be copied directly to or
1939 from memory or even from other types of registers. An example is the
1940 @samp{MQ} register, which on most machines, can only be copied to or
1941 from general registers, but not memory. Some machines allow copying all
1942 registers to and from memory, but require a scratch register for stores
1943 to some memory locations (e.g., those with symbolic address on the RT,
1944 and those with certain symbolic address on the Sparc when compiling
1945 PIC). In some cases, both an intermediate and a scratch register are
1946 required.
1947
1948 You should define these macros to indicate to the reload phase that it may
1949 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
1950 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
1951 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
1952 you should define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
1953 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
1954 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
1955
1956 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
1957 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
1958 should be defined to return the largest register class required. If the
1959 requirements for input and output reloads are the same, the macro
1960 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should be used instead of defining both
1961 macros identically.
1962
1963 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
1964 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
1965 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
1966 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
1967 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
1968
1969 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
1970 intermediate register), you should define patterns for
1971 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
1972 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which will normally be
1973 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
1974 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
1975 register.
1976
1977 Define constraints for the reload register and scratch register that
1978 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
1979 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
1980 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
1981 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
1982 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
1983
1984 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
1985 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
1986 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return -1 if the pseudo is
1987 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
1988
1989 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
1990 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
1991 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
1992 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
1993 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as a
1994 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
1995 general registers.
1996
1997 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED
1998 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
1999 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2000 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2001 those machines to be a C expression that is non-zero if objects of mode
2002 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2003 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2004 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2005
2006 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2007
2008 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX
2009 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2010 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2011 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2012 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2013 defined by this macro.
2014
2015 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2016 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2017
2018 @findex SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE
2019 @item SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2020 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2021 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2022 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2023 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2024 same as that of @var{mode}.
2025
2026 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2027 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2028 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2029 registers.
2030
2031 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2032 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2033 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2034 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2035 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2036 details.
2037
2038 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2039 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2040 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2041
2042 @findex SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2043 @item SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES
2044 On some machines, it is risky to let hard registers live across arbitrary
2045 insns. Typically, these machines have instructions that require values
2046 to be in specific registers (like an accumulator), and reload will fail
2047 if the required hard register is used for another purpose across such an
2048 insn.
2049
2050 Define @code{SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES} to be an expression with a non-zero
2051 value on these machines. When this macro has a non-zero value, the
2052 compiler will try to minimize the lifetime of hard registers.
2053
2054 It is always safe to define this macro with a non-zero value, but if you
2055 unnecessarily define it, you will reduce the amount of optimizations
2056 that can be performed in some cases. If you do not define this macro
2057 with a non-zero value when it is required, the compiler will run out of
2058 spill registers and print a fatal error message. For most machines, you
2059 should not define this macro at all.
2060
2061 @findex CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2062 @item CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P (@var{class})
2063 A C expression whose value is nonzero if pseudos that have been assigned
2064 to registers of class @var{class} would likely be spilled because
2065 registers of @var{class} are needed for spill registers.
2066
2067 The default value of this macro returns 1 if @var{class} has exactly one
2068 register and zero otherwise. On most machines, this default should be
2069 used. Only define this macro to some other expression if pseudos
2070 allocated by @file{local-alloc.c} end up in memory because their hard
2071 registers were needed for spill registers. If this macro returns nonzero
2072 for those classes, those pseudos will only be allocated by
2073 @file{global.c}, which knows how to reallocate the pseudo to another
2074 register. If there would not be another register available for
2075 reallocation, you should not change the definition of this macro since
2076 the only effect of such a definition would be to slow down register
2077 allocation.
2078
2079 @findex CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2080 @item CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2081 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2082 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2083
2084 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2085 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2086 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2087 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2088
2089 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2090 in the reload pass.
2091
2092 @item CLASS_CANNOT_CHANGE_SIZE
2093 If defined, a C expression for a class that contains registers which the
2094 compiler must always access in a mode that is the same size as the mode
2095 in which it loaded the register.
2096
2097 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2098 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64-bits.
2099 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2100 does not store the low-order 32-bits, as would be the case for a normal
2101 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines this macro as
2102 @code{FLOAT_REGS}.
2103 @end table
2104
2105 Three other special macros describe which operands fit which constraint
2106 letters.
2107
2108 @table @code
2109 @findex CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2110 @item CONST_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2111 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2112 letters (@samp{I}, @samp{J}, @samp{K}, @dots{} @samp{P}) that specify
2113 particular ranges of integer values. If @var{c} is one of those
2114 letters, the expression should check that @var{value}, an integer, is in
2115 the appropriate range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is
2116 not one of those letters, the value should be 0 regardless of
2117 @var{value}.
2118
2119 @findex CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P
2120 @item CONST_DOUBLE_OK_FOR_LETTER_P (@var{value}, @var{c})
2121 A C expression that defines the machine-dependent operand constraint
2122 letters that specify particular ranges of @code{const_double} values
2123 (@samp{G} or @samp{H}).
2124
2125 If @var{c} is one of those letters, the expression should check that
2126 @var{value}, an RTX of code @code{const_double}, is in the appropriate
2127 range and return 1 if so, 0 otherwise. If @var{c} is not one of those
2128 letters, the value should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2129
2130 @code{const_double} is used for all floating-point constants and for
2131 @code{DImode} fixed-point constants. A given letter can accept either
2132 or both kinds of values. It can use @code{GET_MODE} to distinguish
2133 between these kinds.
2134
2135 @findex EXTRA_CONSTRAINT
2136 @item EXTRA_CONSTRAINT (@var{value}, @var{c})
2137 A C expression that defines the optional machine-dependent constraint
2138 letters (@samp{Q}, @samp{R}, @samp{S}, @samp{T}, @samp{U}) that can
2139 be used to segregate specific types of operands, usually memory
2140 references, for the target machine. Normally this macro will not be
2141 defined. If it is required for a particular target machine, it should
2142 return 1 if @var{value} corresponds to the operand type represented by
2143 the constraint letter @var{c}. If @var{c} is not defined as an extra
2144 constraint, the value returned should be 0 regardless of @var{value}.
2145
2146 For example, on the ROMP, load instructions cannot have their output in r0 if
2147 the memory reference contains a symbolic address. Constraint letter
2148 @samp{Q} is defined as representing a memory address that does
2149 @emph{not} contain a symbolic address. An alternative is specified with
2150 a @samp{Q} constraint on the input and @samp{r} on the output. The next
2151 alternative specifies @samp{m} on the input and a register class that
2152 does not include r0 on the output.
2153 @end table
2154
2155 @node Stack and Calling
2156 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2157 @cindex calling conventions
2158
2159 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2160 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2161
2162 @menu
2163 * Frame Layout::
2164 * Stack Checking::
2165 * Frame Registers::
2166 * Elimination::
2167 * Stack Arguments::
2168 * Register Arguments::
2169 * Scalar Return::
2170 * Aggregate Return::
2171 * Caller Saves::
2172 * Function Entry::
2173 * Profiling::
2174 @end menu
2175
2176 @node Frame Layout
2177 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2178 @cindex stack frame layout
2179 @cindex frame layout
2180
2181 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2182 Here is the basic stack layout.
2183
2184 @table @code
2185 @findex STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2186 @item STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2187 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2188 pointer to a smaller address.
2189
2190 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{},'' it means that the
2191 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2192 definition used does not matter.
2193
2194 @findex FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2195 @item FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2196 Define this macro if the addresses of local variable slots are at negative
2197 offsets from the frame pointer.
2198
2199 @findex ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2200 @item ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2201 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2202 addresses on the stack.
2203
2204 @findex STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2205 @item STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2206 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2207
2208 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2209 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2210 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2211 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2212 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2213 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2214
2215 @findex STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2216 @item STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2217 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2218 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2219 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2220
2221 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2222 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2223
2224 @findex FIRST_PARM_OFFSET
2225 @item FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2226 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2227 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2228 function.
2229
2230 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2231 the first argument's address.
2232
2233 @findex STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET
2234 @item STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2235 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2236 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2237
2238 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2239 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2240 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2241
2242 @findex DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS
2243 @item DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2244 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2245 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2246 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2247 itself.
2248
2249 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2250 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2251 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2252
2253 @findex SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2254 @item SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2255 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2256 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2257 on the Sparc, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2258 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2259 define this macro.
2260
2261 @findex BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2262 @item BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2263 If defined, a C expression that contains an rtx that is used to store
2264 the address of the current frame into the built in @code{setjmp} buffer.
2265 The default value, @code{virtual_stack_vars_rtx}, is correct for most
2266 machines. One reason you may need to define this macro is if
2267 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} is the appropriate value on your machine.
2268
2269 @findex RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2270 @item RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2271 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2272 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2273 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2274 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2275 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2276
2277 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2278 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is not way to
2279 determine the return address of other frames.
2280
2281 @findex RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2282 @item RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2283 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2284 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2285
2286 @findex INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2287 @item INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2288 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2289 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2290 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2291 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2292 the stack.
2293
2294 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2295 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2296
2297 @findex INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2298 @item INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2299 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2300 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2301 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2302 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2303 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2304
2305 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2306 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2307
2308 @findex ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2309 @item ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET
2310 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2311 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2312 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2313 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2314 during virtual register instantiation.
2315
2316 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2317 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2318 @end table
2319
2320 @node Stack Checking
2321 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2322
2323 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of
2324 the stack, if the @samp{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of three ways:
2325
2326 @enumerate
2327 @item
2328 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2329 will assume that you have arranged for stack checking to be done at
2330 appropriate places in the configuration files, e.g., in
2331 @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}. GCC will do not other special processing.
2332
2333 @item
2334 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and you defined a named pattern
2335 called @code{check_stack} in your @file{md} file, GCC will call that
2336 pattern with one argument which is the address to compare the stack
2337 value against. You must arrange for this pattern to report an error if
2338 the stack pointer is out of range.
2339
2340 @item
2341 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2342 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2343 @end enumerate
2344
2345 Normally, you will use the default values of these macros, so GCC
2346 will use the third approach.
2347
2348 @table @code
2349 @findex STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2350 @item STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2351 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2352 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2353 is require by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to have to stack
2354 checking in some more efficient way than GCC's portable approach.
2355 The default value of this macro is zero.
2356
2357 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2358 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL
2359 An integer representing the interval at which GCC must generate stack
2360 probe instructions. You will normally define this macro to be no larger
2361 than the size of the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The
2362 default value of 4096 is suitable for most systems.
2363
2364 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2365 @item STACK_CHECK_PROBE_LOAD
2366 A integer which is nonzero if GCC should perform the stack probe
2367 as a load instruction and zero if GCC should use a store instruction.
2368 The default is zero, which is the most efficient choice on most systems.
2369
2370 @findex STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2371 @item STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2372 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow,
2373 for languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of
2374 75 words should be adequate for most machines.
2375
2376 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2377 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2378 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2379 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2380 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2381 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2382 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2383 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2384
2385 @findex STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2386 @item STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2387 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2388 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2389 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2390 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2391 use the default of four words.
2392
2393 @findex STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2394 @item STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2395 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2396 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2397 @samp{-fstack-check}.
2398 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2399 normally not need to override that default.
2400 @end table
2401
2402 @need 2000
2403 @node Frame Registers
2404 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2405
2406 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2407 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2408
2409 @table @code
2410 @findex STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2411 @item STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2412 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2413 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2414 the hardware determines which register this is.
2415
2416 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2417 @item FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2418 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2419 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2420 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2421 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2422
2423 @findex HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2424 @item HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2425 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
2426 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
2427 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
2428 between these two locations). On those machines, define
2429 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
2430 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
2431 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
2432 used for the frame pointer.
2433
2434 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
2435 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
2436 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
2437 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
2438 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
2439 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
2440 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2441
2442 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
2443 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
2444
2445 @findex ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2446 @item ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
2447 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
2448 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
2449 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
2450 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
2451 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
2452 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
2453 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
2454 (@pxref{Elimination}).
2455
2456 @findex RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2457 @item RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
2458 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
2459 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
2460 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
2461 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
2462 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
2463 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
2464
2465 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
2466 address from the stack.
2467
2468 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2469 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2470 @item STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
2471 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
2472 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
2473 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
2474 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
2475 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
2476 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
2477 not be defined.@refill
2478
2479 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
2480
2481 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
2482 defined; instead, the next two macros should be defined.
2483
2484 @findex STATIC_CHAIN
2485 @findex STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2486 @item STATIC_CHAIN
2487 @itemx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING
2488 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros provide rtx giving
2489 @code{mem} expressions that denote where they are stored.
2490 @code{STATIC_CHAIN} and @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING} give the locations
2491 as seen by the calling and called functions, respectively. Often the former
2492 will be at an offset from the stack pointer and the latter at an offset from
2493 the frame pointer.@refill
2494
2495 @findex stack_pointer_rtx
2496 @findex frame_pointer_rtx
2497 @findex arg_pointer_rtx
2498 The variables @code{stack_pointer_rtx}, @code{frame_pointer_rtx}, and
2499 @code{arg_pointer_rtx} will have been initialized prior to the use of these
2500 macros and should be used to refer to those items.
2501
2502 If the static chain is passed in a register, the two previous macros should
2503 be defined instead.
2504 @end table
2505
2506 @node Elimination
2507 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
2508
2509 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2510 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
2511
2512 @table @code
2513 @findex FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2514 @item FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
2515 A C expression which is nonzero if a function must have and use a frame
2516 pointer. This expression is evaluated in the reload pass. If its value is
2517 nonzero the function will have a frame pointer.
2518
2519 The expression can in principle examine the current function and decide
2520 according to the facts, but on most machines the constant 0 or the
2521 constant 1 suffices. Use 0 when the machine allows code to be generated
2522 with no frame pointer, and doing so saves some time or space. Use 1
2523 when there is no possible advantage to avoiding a frame pointer.
2524
2525 In certain cases, the compiler does not know how to produce valid code
2526 without a frame pointer. The compiler recognizes those cases and
2527 automatically gives the function a frame pointer regardless of what
2528 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} says. You don't need to worry about
2529 them.@refill
2530
2531 In a function that does not require a frame pointer, the frame pointer
2532 register can be allocated for ordinary usage, unless you mark it as a
2533 fixed register. See @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} for more information.
2534
2535 @findex INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET
2536 @findex get_frame_size
2537 @item INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
2538 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
2539 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
2540 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
2541 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
2542 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
2543
2544 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
2545 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
2546 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} is defined to always be true; in that
2547 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
2548
2549 @findex ELIMINABLE_REGS
2550 @item ELIMINABLE_REGS
2551 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
2552 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
2553 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
2554 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
2555
2556 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
2557 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
2558
2559 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
2560 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
2561 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
2562 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
2563 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
2564
2565 In this case, you might specify:
2566 @example
2567 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
2568 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2569 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
2570 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
2571 @end example
2572
2573 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
2574 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
2575
2576 @findex CAN_ELIMINATE
2577 @item CAN_ELIMINATE (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg})
2578 A C expression that returns non-zero if the compiler is allowed to try
2579 to replace register number @var{from-reg} with register number
2580 @var{to-reg}. This macro need only be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS}
2581 is defined, and will usually be the constant 1, since most of the cases
2582 preventing register elimination are things that the compiler already
2583 knows about.
2584
2585 @findex INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET
2586 @item INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
2587 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
2588 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
2589 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
2590 defined.
2591
2592 @findex LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2593 @item LONGJMP_RESTORE_FROM_STACK
2594 Define this macro if the @code{longjmp} function restores registers from
2595 the stack frames, rather than from those saved specifically by
2596 @code{setjmp}. Certain quantities must not be kept in registers across
2597 a call to @code{setjmp} on such machines.
2598 @end table
2599
2600 @node Stack Arguments
2601 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
2602 @cindex arguments on stack
2603 @cindex stack arguments
2604
2605 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
2606 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
2607 control passing certain arguments in registers.
2608
2609 @table @code
2610 @findex PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2611 @item PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
2612 A C expression whose value is nonzero if an argument declared in
2613 a prototype as an integral type smaller than @code{int} should
2614 actually be passed as an @code{int}. In addition to avoiding
2615 errors in certain cases of mismatch, it also makes for better
2616 code on certain machines. If the macro is not defined in target
2617 header files, it defaults to 0.
2618
2619 @findex PUSH_ROUNDING
2620 @item PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
2621 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
2622 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
2623
2624 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, do not define
2625 this macro. That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
2626 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
2627 it.
2628
2629 On some machines, the definition
2630
2631 @example
2632 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
2633 @end example
2634
2635 @noindent
2636 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
2637 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
2638 alignment. Then the definition should be
2639
2640 @example
2641 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
2642 @end example
2643
2644 @findex ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2645 @findex current_function_outgoing_args_size
2646 @item ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
2647 If defined, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
2648 will be computed and placed into the variable
2649 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
2650 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
2651 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
2652
2653 Defining both @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
2654 is not proper.
2655
2656 @findex REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2657 @item REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
2658 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
2659 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
2660 registers.
2661
2662 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
2663 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
2664 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
2665
2666 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
2667 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
2668 which.
2669 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
2670 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
2671
2672 @findex MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2673 @findex FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2674 @item MAYBE_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2675 @itemx FINAL_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{const_size}, @var{var_size})
2676 Define these macros in addition to the one above if functions might
2677 allocate stack space for arguments even when their values are passed
2678 in registers. These should be used when the stack space allocated
2679 for arguments in registers is not a simple constant independent of the
2680 function declaration.
2681
2682 The value of the first macro is the size, in bytes, of the area that
2683 we should initially assume would be reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2684
2685 The value of the second macro is the actual size, in bytes, of the area
2686 that will be reserved for arguments passed in registers. This takes two
2687 arguments: an integer representing the number of bytes of fixed sized
2688 arguments on the stack, and a tree representing the number of bytes of
2689 variable sized arguments on the stack.
2690
2691 When these macros are defined, @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} will only be
2692 called for libcall functions, the current function, or for a function
2693 being called when it is known that such stack space must be allocated.
2694 In each case this value can be easily computed.
2695
2696 When deciding whether a called function needs such stack space, and how
2697 much space to reserve, GCC uses these two macros instead of
2698 @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}.
2699
2700 @findex OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2701 @item OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE
2702 Define this if it is the responsibility of the caller to allocate the area
2703 reserved for arguments passed in registers.
2704
2705 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
2706 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
2707 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size}.
2708
2709 @findex STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2710 @item STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
2711 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
2712 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
2713 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
2714 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
2715
2716 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
2717 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
2718 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
2719 stack in its natural location.
2720
2721 @findex RETURN_POPS_ARGS
2722 @item RETURN_POPS_ARGS (@var{fundecl}, @var{funtype}, @var{stack-size})
2723 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes of its own
2724 arguments that a function pops on returning, or 0 if the
2725 function pops no arguments and the caller must therefore pop them all
2726 after the function returns.
2727
2728 @var{fundecl} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that describes
2729 the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2730 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} that describes the declaration of the function.
2731 From this you can obtain the DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of the function.
2732
2733 @var{funtype} is a C variable whose value is a tree node that
2734 describes the function in question. Normally it is a node of type
2735 @code{FUNCTION_TYPE} that describes the data type of the function.
2736 From this it is possible to obtain the data types of the value and
2737 arguments (if known).
2738
2739 When a call to a library function is being considered, @var{fundecl}
2740 will contain an identifier node for the library function. Thus, if
2741 you need to distinguish among various library functions, you can do so
2742 by their names. Note that ``library function'' in this context means
2743 a function used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known specially
2744 in the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being compiled.
2745
2746 @var{stack-size} is the number of bytes of arguments passed on the
2747 stack. If a variable number of bytes is passed, it is zero, and
2748 argument popping will always be the responsibility of the calling function.
2749
2750 On the Vax, all functions always pop their arguments, so the definition
2751 of this macro is @var{stack-size}. On the 68000, using the standard
2752 calling convention, no functions pop their arguments, so the value of
2753 the macro is always 0 in this case. But an alternative calling
2754 convention is available in which functions that take a fixed number of
2755 arguments pop them but other functions (such as @code{printf}) pop
2756 nothing (the caller pops all). When this convention is in use,
2757 @var{funtype} is examined to determine whether a function takes a fixed
2758 number of arguments.
2759 @end table
2760
2761 @node Register Arguments
2762 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
2763 @cindex arguments in registers
2764 @cindex registers arguments
2765
2766 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
2767 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
2768 the stack.
2769
2770 @table @code
2771 @findex FUNCTION_ARG
2772 @item FUNCTION_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2773 A C expression that controls whether a function argument is passed
2774 in a register, and which register.
2775
2776 The arguments are @var{cum}, which summarizes all the previous
2777 arguments; @var{mode}, the machine mode of the argument; @var{type},
2778 the data type of the argument as a tree node or 0 if that is not known
2779 (which happens for C support library functions); and @var{named},
2780 which is 1 for an ordinary argument and 0 for nameless arguments that
2781 correspond to @samp{@dots{}} in the called function's prototype.
2782
2783 The value of the expression is usually either a @code{reg} RTX for the
2784 hard register in which to pass the argument, or zero to pass the
2785 argument on the stack.
2786
2787 For machines like the Vax and 68000, where normally all arguments are
2788 pushed, zero suffices as a definition.
2789
2790 The value of the expression can also be a @code{parallel} RTX. This is
2791 used when an argument is passed in multiple locations. The mode of the
2792 of the @code{parallel} should be the mode of the entire argument. The
2793 @code{parallel} holds any number of @code{expr_list} pairs; each one
2794 describes where part of the argument is passed. In each
2795 @code{expr_list} the first operand must be a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
2796 register in which to pass this part of the argument, and the mode of the
2797 register RTX indicates how large this part of the argument is. The
2798 second operand of the @code{expr_list} is a @code{const_int} which gives
2799 the offset in bytes into the entire argument of where this part starts.
2800 As a special exception the first @code{expr_list} in the @code{parallel}
2801 RTX may have a first operand of zero. This indicates that the entire
2802 argument is also stored on the stack.
2803
2804 @cindex @file{stdarg.h} and register arguments
2805 The usual way to make the ANSI library @file{stdarg.h} work on a machine
2806 where some arguments are usually passed in registers, is to cause
2807 nameless arguments to be passed on the stack instead. This is done
2808 by making @code{FUNCTION_ARG} return 0 whenever @var{named} is 0.
2809
2810 @cindex @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2811 @cindex @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, and @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2812 You may use the macro @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})}
2813 in the definition of this macro to determine if this argument is of a
2814 type that must be passed in the stack. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}
2815 is not defined and @code{FUNCTION_ARG} returns non-zero for such an
2816 argument, the compiler will abort. If @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is
2817 defined, the argument will be computed in the stack and then loaded into
2818 a register.
2819
2820 @findex MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
2821 @item MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2822 Define as a C expression that evaluates to nonzero if we do not know how
2823 to pass TYPE solely in registers. The file @file{expr.h} defines a
2824 definition that is usually appropriate, refer to @file{expr.h} for additional
2825 documentation.
2826
2827 @findex FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
2828 @item FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2829 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows'', so
2830 that the register in which a function sees an arguments is not
2831 necessarily the same as the one in which the caller passed the
2832 argument.
2833
2834 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_ARG} computes the register in which
2835 the caller passes the value, and @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} should
2836 be defined in a similar fashion to tell the function being called
2837 where the arguments will arrive.
2838
2839 If @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG} is not defined, @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
2840 serves both purposes.@refill
2841
2842 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS
2843 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PARTIAL_NREGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2844 A C expression for the number of words, at the beginning of an
2845 argument, must be put in registers. The value must be zero for
2846 arguments that are passed entirely in registers or that are entirely
2847 pushed on the stack.
2848
2849 On some machines, certain arguments must be passed partially in
2850 registers and partially in memory. On these machines, typically the
2851 first @var{n} words of arguments are passed in registers, and the rest
2852 on the stack. If a multi-word argument (a @code{double} or a
2853 structure) crosses that boundary, its first few words must be passed
2854 in registers and the rest must be pushed. This macro tells the
2855 compiler when this occurs, and how many of the words should go in
2856 registers.
2857
2858 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for these arguments should return the first
2859 register to be used by the caller for this argument; likewise
2860 @code{FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG}, for the called function.
2861
2862 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
2863 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2864 A C expression that indicates when an argument must be passed by reference.
2865 If nonzero for an argument, a copy of that argument is made in memory and a
2866 pointer to the argument is passed instead of the argument itself.
2867 The pointer is passed in whatever way is appropriate for passing a pointer
2868 to that type.
2869
2870 On machines where @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is not defined, a suitable
2871 definition of this macro might be
2872 @smallexample
2873 #define FUNCTION_ARG_PASS_BY_REFERENCE\
2874 (CUM, MODE, TYPE, NAMED) \
2875 MUST_PASS_IN_STACK (MODE, TYPE)
2876 @end smallexample
2877 @c this is *still* too long. --mew 5feb93
2878
2879 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES
2880 @item FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2881 If defined, a C expression that indicates when it is the called function's
2882 responsibility to make a copy of arguments passed by invisible reference.
2883 Normally, the caller makes a copy and passes the address of the copy to the
2884 routine being called. When FUNCTION_ARG_CALLEE_COPIES is defined and is
2885 nonzero, the caller does not make a copy. Instead, it passes a pointer to the
2886 ``live'' value. The called function must not modify this value. If it can be
2887 determined that the value won't be modified, it need not make a copy;
2888 otherwise a copy must be made.
2889
2890 @findex CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2891 @item CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2892 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument of
2893 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some target machines,
2894 the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number of bytes of
2895 argument so far.
2896
2897 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
2898 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
2899 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
2900 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
2901 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
2902 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
2903
2904 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS
2905 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{indirect})
2906 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable @var{cum}
2907 for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The variable has
2908 type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype} is the tree node
2909 for the data type of the function which will receive the args, or 0
2910 if the args are to a compiler support library function. The value of
2911 @var{indirect} is nonzero when processing an indirect call, for example
2912 a call through a function pointer. The value of @var{indirect} is zero
2913 for a call to an explicitly named function, a library function call, or when
2914 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
2915 being compiled.
2916
2917 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
2918 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
2919 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
2920 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
2921 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
2922 never both of them at once.
2923
2924 @findex INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS
2925 @item INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
2926 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
2927 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
2928 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
2929
2930 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
2931 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC. The
2932 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
2933 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
2934 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
2935 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
2936
2937 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
2938 @item FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{named})
2939 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the summarizer variable
2940 @var{cum} to advance past an argument in the argument list. The
2941 values @var{mode}, @var{type} and @var{named} describe that argument.
2942 Once this is done, the variable @var{cum} is suitable for analyzing
2943 the @emph{following} argument with @code{FUNCTION_ARG}, etc.@refill
2944
2945 This macro need not do anything if the argument in question was passed
2946 on the stack. The compiler knows how to track the amount of stack space
2947 used for arguments without any special help.
2948
2949 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING
2950 @item FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2951 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
2952 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
2953 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
2954 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
2955
2956 The @emph{amount} of padding is always just enough to reach the next
2957 multiple of @code{FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY}; this macro does not control
2958 it.
2959
2960 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
2961 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
2962 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
2963 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
2964
2965 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
2966 @item FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY (@var{mode}, @var{type})
2967 If defined, a C expression that gives the alignment boundary, in bits,
2968 of an argument with the specified mode and type. If it is not defined,
2969 @code{PARM_BOUNDARY} is used for all arguments.
2970
2971 @findex FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P
2972 @item FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
2973 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
2974 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
2975 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
2976 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
2977 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
2978 stack.
2979
2980 @findex LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2981 @item LOAD_ARGS_REVERSED
2982 If defined, the order in which arguments are loaded into their
2983 respective argument registers is reversed so that the last
2984 argument is loaded first. This macro only affects arguments
2985 passed in registers.
2986
2987 @end table
2988
2989 @node Scalar Return
2990 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
2991 @cindex return values in registers
2992 @cindex values, returned by functions
2993 @cindex scalars, returned as values
2994
2995 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
2996 values---values that can fit in registers.
2997
2998 @table @code
2999 @findex TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3000 @item TRADITIONAL_RETURN_FLOAT
3001 Define this macro if @samp{-traditional} should not cause functions
3002 declared to return @code{float} to convert the value to @code{double}.
3003
3004 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE
3005 @item FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3006 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a
3007 function returns a value of data type @var{valtype}. @var{valtype} is
3008 a tree node representing a data type. Write @code{TYPE_MODE
3009 (@var{valtype})} to get the machine mode used to represent that type.
3010 On many machines, only the mode is relevant. (Actually, on most
3011 machines, scalar values are returned in the same place regardless of
3012 mode).@refill
3013
3014 The value of the expression is usually a @code{reg} RTX for the hard
3015 register where the return value is stored. The value can also be a
3016 @code{parallel} RTX, if the return value is in multiple places. See
3017 @code{FUNCTION_ARG} for an explanation of the @code{parallel} form.
3018
3019 If @code{PROMOTE_FUNCTION_RETURN} is defined, you must apply the same
3020 promotion rules specified in @code{PROMOTE_MODE} if @var{valtype} is a
3021 scalar type.
3022
3023 If the precise function being called is known, @var{func} is a tree
3024 node (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3025 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3026 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3027 known.@refill
3028
3029 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} is not used for return vales with aggregate data
3030 types, because these are returned in another way. See
3031 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3032
3033 @findex FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE
3034 @item FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3035 Define this macro if the target machine has ``register windows''
3036 so that the register in which a function returns its value is not
3037 the same as the one in which the caller sees the value.
3038
3039 For such machines, @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} computes the register in which
3040 the caller will see the value. @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} should be
3041 defined in a similar fashion to tell the function where to put the
3042 value.@refill
3043
3044 If @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not defined,
3045 @code{FUNCTION_VALUE} serves both purposes.@refill
3046
3047 @code{FUNCTION_OUTGOING_VALUE} is not used for return vales with
3048 aggregate data types, because these are returned in another way. See
3049 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} and related macros, below.
3050
3051 @findex LIBCALL_VALUE
3052 @item LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3053 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3054 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}. If the precise function
3055 being called is known, @var{func} is a tree node
3056 (@code{FUNCTION_DECL}) for it; otherwise, @var{func} is a null
3057 pointer. This makes it possible to use a different value-returning
3058 convention for specific functions when all their calls are
3059 known.@refill
3060
3061 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3062 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3063 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3064 compiled.
3065
3066 The definition of @code{LIBRARY_VALUE} need not be concerned aggregate
3067 data types, because none of the library functions returns such types.
3068
3069 @findex FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3070 @item FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3071 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3072 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3073
3074 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3075 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3076 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3077 suffices:
3078
3079 @example
3080 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3081 @end example
3082
3083 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3084 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3085 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3086
3087 @findex APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3088 @item APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3089 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3090 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3091 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3092 @end table
3093
3094 @node Aggregate Return
3095 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3096 @cindex aggregates as return values
3097 @cindex large return values
3098 @cindex returning aggregate values
3099 @cindex structure value address
3100
3101 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3102 cases), the value is not returned according to @code{FUNCTION_VALUE}
3103 (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the caller passes the address of a
3104 block of memory in which the value should be stored. This address
3105 is called the @dfn{structure value address}.
3106
3107 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3108 memory.
3109
3110 @table @code
3111 @findex RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3112 @item RETURN_IN_MEMORY (@var{type})
3113 A C expression which can inhibit the returning of certain function
3114 values in registers, based on the type of value. A nonzero value says
3115 to return the function value in memory, just as large structures are
3116 always returned. Here @var{type} will be a C expression of type
3117 @code{tree}, representing the data type of the value.
3118
3119 Note that values of mode @code{BLKmode} must be explicitly handled
3120 by this macro. Also, the option @samp{-fpcc-struct-return}
3121 takes effect regardless of this macro. On most systems, it is
3122 possible to leave the macro undefined; this causes a default
3123 definition to be used, whose value is the constant 1 for @code{BLKmode}
3124 values, and 0 otherwise.
3125
3126 Do not use this macro to indicate that structures and unions should always
3127 be returned in memory. You should instead use @code{DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN}
3128 to indicate this.
3129
3130 @findex DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3131 @item DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3132 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3133 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3134 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI.
3135 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3136 and union return values are decided by the @code{RETURN_IN_MEMORY} macro.
3137
3138 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3139
3140 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3141 @item STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM
3142 If the structure value address is passed in a register, then
3143 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_REGNUM} should be the number of that register.
3144
3145 @findex STRUCT_VALUE
3146 @item STRUCT_VALUE
3147 If the structure value address is not passed in a register, define
3148 @code{STRUCT_VALUE} as an expression returning an RTX for the place
3149 where the address is passed. If it returns 0, the address is passed as
3150 an ``invisible'' first argument.
3151
3152 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3153 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING_REGNUM
3154 On some architectures the place where the structure value address
3155 is found by the called function is not the same place that the
3156 caller put it. This can be due to register windows, or it could
3157 be because the function prologue moves it to a different place.
3158
3159 If the incoming location of the structure value address is in a
3160 register, define this macro as the register number.
3161
3162 @findex STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3163 @item STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING
3164 If the incoming location is not a register, then you should define
3165 @code{STRUCT_VALUE_INCOMING} as an expression for an RTX for where the
3166 called function should find the value. If it should find the value on
3167 the stack, define this to create a @code{mem} which refers to the frame
3168 pointer. A definition of 0 means that the address is passed as an
3169 ``invisible'' first argument.
3170
3171 @findex PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3172 @item PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3173 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3174 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3175 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3176
3177 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3178 pass an address to the subroutine.
3179
3180 This macro has effect in @samp{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3181 nothing when you use @samp{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3182 @end table
3183
3184 @node Caller Saves
3185 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3186
3187 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3188 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3189 must live across calls.
3190
3191 @table @code
3192 @findex DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3193 @item DEFAULT_CALLER_SAVES
3194 Define this macro if function calls on the target machine do not preserve
3195 any registers; in other words, if @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} has 1
3196 for all registers. When defined, this macro enables @samp{-fcaller-saves}
3197 by default for all optimization levels. It has no effect for optimization
3198 levels 2 and higher, where @samp{-fcaller-saves} is the default.
3199
3200 @findex CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE
3201 @item CALLER_SAVE_PROFITABLE (@var{refs}, @var{calls})
3202 A C expression to determine whether it is worthwhile to consider placing
3203 a pseudo-register in a call-clobbered hard register and saving and
3204 restoring it around each function call. The expression should be 1 when
3205 this is worth doing, and 0 otherwise.
3206
3207 If you don't define this macro, a default is used which is good on most
3208 machines: @code{4 * @var{calls} < @var{refs}}.
3209
3210 @findex HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE
3211 @item HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3212 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3213 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3214 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3215 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3216 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3217 @end table
3218
3219 @node Function Entry
3220 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3221 @cindex function entry and exit
3222 @cindex prologue
3223 @cindex epilogue
3224
3225 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3226 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3227
3228 @table @code
3229 @findex FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3230 @item FUNCTION_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3231 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for entry to a
3232 function. The prologue is responsible for setting up the stack frame,
3233 initializing the frame pointer register, saving registers that must be
3234 saved, and allocating @var{size} additional bytes of storage for the
3235 local variables. @var{size} is an integer. @var{file} is a stdio
3236 stream to which the assembler code should be output.
3237
3238 The label for the beginning of the function need not be output by this
3239 macro. That has already been done when the macro is run.
3240
3241 @findex regs_ever_live
3242 To determine which registers to save, the macro can refer to the array
3243 @code{regs_ever_live}: element @var{r} is nonzero if hard register
3244 @var{r} is used anywhere within the function. This implies the function
3245 prologue should save register @var{r}, provided it is not one of the
3246 call-used registers. (@code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must likewise use
3247 @code{regs_ever_live}.)
3248
3249 On machines that have ``register windows'', the function entry code does
3250 not save on the stack the registers that are in the windows, even if
3251 they are supposed to be preserved by function calls; instead it takes
3252 appropriate steps to ``push'' the register stack, if any non-call-used
3253 registers are used in the function.
3254
3255 @findex frame_pointer_needed
3256 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3257 function entry code must vary accordingly; it must set up the frame
3258 pointer if one is wanted, and not otherwise. To determine whether a
3259 frame pointer is in wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3260 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 at run
3261 time in a function that needs a frame pointer. @xref{Elimination}.
3262
3263 The function entry code is responsible for allocating any stack space
3264 required for the function. This stack space consists of the regions
3265 listed below. In most cases, these regions are allocated in the
3266 order listed, with the last listed region closest to the top of the
3267 stack (the lowest address if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and
3268 the highest address if it is not defined). You can use a different order
3269 for a machine if doing so is more convenient or required for
3270 compatibility reasons. Except in cases where required by standard
3271 or by a debugger, there is no reason why the stack layout used by GCC
3272 need agree with that used by other compilers for a machine.
3273
3274 @itemize @bullet
3275 @item
3276 @findex current_function_pretend_args_size
3277 A region of @code{current_function_pretend_args_size} bytes of
3278 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3279 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3280 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3281 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3282 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3283 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3284 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3285 features in @file{varargs.h} and @file{stdargs.h}.
3286
3287 @item
3288 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3289 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3290 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3291 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3292 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3293 a save area.
3294
3295 @item
3296 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3297 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3298 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3299 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3300
3301 @item
3302 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3303 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3304 @code{current_function_outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3305 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3306 @end itemize
3307
3308 Normally, it is necessary for the macros @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3309 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to treat leaf functions specially. The C
3310 variable @code{current_function_is_leaf} is nonzero for such a function.
3311
3312 @findex EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3313 @item EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3314 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3315 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3316 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3317 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function.
3318
3319 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3320 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3321 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3322 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3323
3324 @findex EPILOGUE_USES
3325 @item EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3326 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers are
3327 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3328 pointer registers are already be assumed to be used as needed.
3329
3330 @findex FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3331 @item FUNCTION_EPILOGUE (@var{file}, @var{size})
3332 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for exit from a
3333 function. The epilogue is responsible for restoring the saved
3334 registers and stack pointer to their values when the function was
3335 called, and returning control to the caller. This macro takes the
3336 same arguments as the macro @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE}, and the
3337 registers to restore are determined from @code{regs_ever_live} and
3338 @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} in the same way.
3339
3340 On some machines, there is a single instruction that does all the work
3341 of returning from the function. On these machines, give that
3342 instruction the name @samp{return} and do not define the macro
3343 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} at all.
3344
3345 Do not define a pattern named @samp{return} if you want the
3346 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} to be used. If you want the target switches
3347 to control whether return instructions or epilogues are used, define a
3348 @samp{return} pattern with a validity condition that tests the target
3349 switches appropriately. If the @samp{return} pattern's validity
3350 condition is false, epilogues will be used.
3351
3352 On machines where functions may or may not have frame-pointers, the
3353 function exit code must vary accordingly. Sometimes the code for these
3354 two cases is completely different. To determine whether a frame pointer
3355 is wanted, the macro can refer to the variable
3356 @code{frame_pointer_needed}. The variable's value will be 1 when compiling
3357 a function that needs a frame pointer.
3358
3359 Normally, @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must
3360 treat leaf functions specially. The C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
3361 is nonzero for such a function. @xref{Leaf Functions}.
3362
3363 On some machines, some functions pop their arguments on exit while
3364 others leave that for the caller to do. For example, the 68020 when
3365 given @samp{-mrtd} pops arguments in functions that take a fixed
3366 number of arguments.
3367
3368 @findex current_function_pops_args
3369 Your definition of the macro @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} decides which
3370 functions pop their own arguments. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} needs to
3371 know what was decided. The variable that is called
3372 @code{current_function_pops_args} is the number of bytes of its
3373 arguments that a function should pop. @xref{Scalar Return}.
3374 @c what is the "its arguments" in the above sentence referring to, pray
3375 @c tell? --mew 5feb93
3376
3377 @findex DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3378 @item DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE
3379 Define this macro if the function epilogue contains delay slots to which
3380 instructions from the rest of the function can be ``moved''. The
3381 definition should be a C expression whose value is an integer
3382 representing the number of delay slots there.
3383
3384 @findex ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY
3385 @item ELIGIBLE_FOR_EPILOGUE_DELAY (@var{insn}, @var{n})
3386 A C expression that returns 1 if @var{insn} can be placed in delay
3387 slot number @var{n} of the epilogue.
3388
3389 The argument @var{n} is an integer which identifies the delay slot now
3390 being considered (since different slots may have different rules of
3391 eligibility). It is never negative and is always less than the number
3392 of epilogue delay slots (what @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE} returns).
3393 If you reject a particular insn for a given delay slot, in principle, it
3394 may be reconsidered for a subsequent delay slot. Also, other insns may
3395 (at least in principle) be considered for the so far unfilled delay
3396 slot.
3397
3398 @findex current_function_epilogue_delay_list
3399 @findex final_scan_insn
3400 The insns accepted to fill the epilogue delay slots are put in an RTL
3401 list made with @code{insn_list} objects, stored in the variable
3402 @code{current_function_epilogue_delay_list}. The insn for the first
3403 delay slot comes first in the list. Your definition of the macro
3404 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} should fill the delay slots by outputting the
3405 insns in this list, usually by calling @code{final_scan_insn}.
3406
3407 You need not define this macro if you did not define
3408 @code{DELAY_SLOTS_FOR_EPILOGUE}.
3409
3410 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3411 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK (@var{file}, @var{thunk_fndecl}, @var{delta}, @var{function})
3412 A C compound statement that outputs the assembler code for a thunk
3413 function, used to implement C++ virtual function calls with multiple
3414 inheritance. The thunk acts as a wrapper around a virtual function,
3415 adjusting the implicit object parameter before handing control off to
3416 the real function.
3417
3418 First, emit code to add the integer @var{delta} to the location that
3419 contains the incoming first argument. Assume that this argument
3420 contains a pointer, and is the one used to pass the @code{this} pointer
3421 in C++. This is the incoming argument @emph{before} the function prologue,
3422 e.g. @samp{%o0} on a sparc. The addition must preserve the values of
3423 all other incoming arguments.
3424
3425 After the addition, emit code to jump to @var{function}, which is a
3426 @code{FUNCTION_DECL}. This is a direct pure jump, not a call, and does
3427 not touch the return address. Hence returning from @var{FUNCTION} will
3428 return to whoever called the current @samp{thunk}.
3429
3430 The effect must be as if @var{function} had been called directly with
3431 the adjusted first argument. This macro is responsible for emitting all
3432 of the code for a thunk function; @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3433 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} are not invoked.
3434
3435 The @var{thunk_fndecl} is redundant. (@var{delta} and @var{function}
3436 have already been extracted from it.) It might possibly be useful on
3437 some targets, but probably not.
3438
3439 If you do not define this macro, the target-independent code in the C++
3440 frontend will generate a less efficient heavyweight thunk that calls
3441 @var{function} instead of jumping to it. The generic approach does
3442 not support varargs.
3443 @end table
3444
3445 @node Profiling
3446 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3447 @cindex profiling, code generation
3448
3449 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3450
3451 @table @code
3452 @findex FUNCTION_PROFILER
3453 @item FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3454 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3455 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3456 Before calling, the assembler code must load the address of a
3457 counter variable into a register where @code{mcount} expects to
3458 find the address. The name of this variable is @samp{LP} followed
3459 by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate the name using
3460 @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3461
3462 @findex mcount
3463 The details of how the address should be passed to @code{mcount} are
3464 determined by your operating system environment, not by GCC. To
3465 figure them out, compile a small program for profiling using the
3466 system's installed C compiler and look at the assembler code that
3467 results.
3468
3469 @findex PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3470 @item PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3471 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3472 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3473
3474 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER
3475 @vindex profile_block_flag
3476 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3477 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3478 assembler code to initialize basic-block profiling for the current
3479 object module. The global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag}
3480 distinguishes two profile modes.
3481
3482 @table @code
3483 @findex __bb_init_func
3484 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3485 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_func} once per
3486 object module, passing it as its sole argument the address of a block
3487 allocated in the object module.
3488
3489 The name of the block is a local symbol made with this statement:
3490
3491 @smallexample
3492 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3493 @end smallexample
3494
3495 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3496 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3497 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3498 that you know will result.
3499
3500 The first word of this block is a flag which will be nonzero if the
3501 object module has already been initialized. So test this word first,
3502 and do not call @code{__bb_init_func} if the flag is
3503 nonzero. BLOCK_OR_LABEL contains a unique number which may be used to
3504 generate a label as a branch destination when @code{__bb_init_func}
3505 will not be called.
3506
3507 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3508
3509 @example
3510 cmp (LPBX0),0
3511 bne local_label
3512 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3513 call __bb_init_func
3514 local_label:
3515 @end example
3516
3517 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3518 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3519 Output code to call the subroutine @code{__bb_init_trace_func}
3520 and pass two parameters to it. The first parameter is the same as
3521 for @code{__bb_init_func}. The second parameter is the number of the
3522 first basic block of the function as given by BLOCK_OR_LABEL. Note
3523 that @code{__bb_init_trace_func} has to be called, even if the object
3524 module has been initialized already.
3525
3526 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3527 @example
3528 parameter1 <- LPBX0
3529 parameter2 <- BLOCK_OR_LABEL
3530 call __bb_init_trace_func
3531 @end example
3532 @end table
3533
3534 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER
3535 @vindex profile_block_flag
3536 @item BLOCK_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{blockno})
3537 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3538 assembler code to increment the count associated with the basic
3539 block number @var{blockno}. The global compile flag
3540 @code{profile_block_flag} distinguishes two profile modes.
3541
3542 @table @code
3543 @item profile_block_flag != 2
3544 Output code to increment the counter directly. Basic blocks are
3545 numbered separately from zero within each compilation. The count
3546 associated with block number @var{blockno} is at index
3547 @var{blockno} in a vector of words; the name of this array is a local
3548 symbol made with this statement:
3549
3550 @smallexample
3551 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 2);
3552 @end smallexample
3553
3554 @c This paragraph is the same as one a few paragraphs up.
3555 @c That is not an error.
3556 Of course, since you are writing the definition of
3557 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} as well as that of this macro, you
3558 can take a short cut in the definition of this macro and use the name
3559 that you know will result.
3560
3561 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3562
3563 @smallexample
3564 inc (LPBX2+4*BLOCKNO)
3565 @end smallexample
3566
3567 @vindex __bb
3568 @findex __bb_trace_func
3569 @item profile_block_flag == 2
3570 Output code to initialize the global structure @code{__bb} and
3571 call the function @code{__bb_trace_func}, which will increment the
3572 counter.
3573
3574 @code{__bb} consists of two words. In the first word, the current
3575 basic block number, as given by BLOCKNO, has to be stored. In
3576 the second word, the address of a block allocated in the object
3577 module has to be stored. The address is given by the label created
3578 with this statement:
3579
3580 @smallexample
3581 ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{buffer}, "LPBX", 0);
3582 @end smallexample
3583
3584 Described in assembler language, the code to be output looks like:
3585 @example
3586 move BLOCKNO -> (__bb)
3587 move LPBX0 -> (__bb+4)
3588 call __bb_trace_func
3589 @end example
3590 @end table
3591
3592 @findex FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT
3593 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3594 @vindex profile_block_flag
3595 @item FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT (@var{file})
3596 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file}
3597 assembler code to call function @code{__bb_trace_ret}. The
3598 assembler code should only be output
3599 if the global compile flag @code{profile_block_flag} == 2. This
3600 macro has to be used at every place where code for returning from
3601 a function is generated (e.g. @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}). Although
3602 you have to write the definition of @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}
3603 as well, you have to define this macro to tell the compiler, that
3604 the proper call to @code{__bb_trace_ret} is produced.
3605
3606 @findex MACHINE_STATE_SAVE
3607 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3608 @findex __bb_trace_func
3609 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3610 @item MACHINE_STATE_SAVE (@var{id})
3611 A C statement or compound statement to save all registers, which may
3612 be clobbered by a function call, including condition codes. The
3613 @code{asm} statement will be mostly likely needed to handle this
3614 task. Local labels in the assembler code can be concatenated with the
3615 string @var{id}, to obtain a unique lable name.
3616
3617 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3618 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be saved in the macros
3619 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3620 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} prior calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3621 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3622
3623 @findex MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE
3624 @findex __bb_init_trace_func
3625 @findex __bb_trace_func
3626 @findex __bb_trace_ret
3627 @item MACHINE_STATE_RESTORE (@var{id})
3628 A C statement or compound statement to restore all registers, including
3629 condition codes, saved by @code{MACHINE_STATE_SAVE}.
3630
3631 Registers or condition codes clobbered by @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} or
3632 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must be restored in the macros
3633 @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER}, @code{FUNCTION_BLOCK_PROFILER_EXIT} and
3634 @code{BLOCK_PROFILER} after calling @code{__bb_init_trace_func},
3635 @code{__bb_trace_ret} and @code{__bb_trace_func} respectively.
3636
3637 @findex BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3638 @item BLOCK_PROFILER_CODE
3639 A C function or functions which are needed in the library to
3640 support block profiling.
3641 @end table
3642
3643 @node Varargs
3644 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3645 @cindex varargs implementation
3646
3647 GCC comes with an implementation of @file{varargs.h} and
3648 @file{stdarg.h} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3649 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3650 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3651 conditionals to include it.
3652
3653 ANSI @file{stdarg.h} differs from traditional @file{varargs.h} mainly in
3654 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3655 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3656 to store the argument pointer. The ANSI implementation of
3657 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3658 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3659
3660 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3661 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3662 below.
3663
3664 @table @code
3665 @findex __builtin_saveregs
3666 @item __builtin_saveregs ()
3667 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3668 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ANSI and traditional
3669 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3670 you use @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3671
3672 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3673 control of the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On other machines,
3674 it calls a routine written in assembler language, found in
3675 @file{libgcc2.c}.
3676
3677 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3678 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3679 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3680 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3681 to use them for its own purposes.
3682 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3683 @c 10feb93
3684
3685 @findex __builtin_args_info
3686 @item __builtin_args_info (@var{category})
3687 Use this built-in function to find the first anonymous arguments in
3688 registers.
3689
3690 In general, a machine may have several categories of registers used for
3691 arguments, each for a particular category of data types. (For example,
3692 on some machines, floating-point registers are used for floating-point
3693 arguments while other arguments are passed in the general registers.)
3694 To make non-varargs functions use the proper calling convention, you
3695 have defined the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data type to record how many
3696 registers in each category have been used so far
3697
3698 @code{__builtin_args_info} accesses the same data structure of type
3699 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} after the ordinary argument layout is finished
3700 with it, with @var{category} specifying which word to access. Thus, the
3701 value indicates the first unused register in a given category.
3702
3703 Normally, you would use @code{__builtin_args_info} in the implementation
3704 of @code{va_start}, accessing each category just once and storing the
3705 value in the @code{va_list} object. This is because @code{va_list} will
3706 have to update the values, and there is no way to alter the
3707 values accessed by @code{__builtin_args_info}.
3708
3709 @findex __builtin_next_arg
3710 @item __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3711 This is the equivalent of @code{__builtin_args_info}, for stack
3712 arguments. It returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3713 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3714 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3715 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3716 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3717 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3718 of the current function.
3719
3720 @findex __builtin_classify_type
3721 @item __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3722 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3723 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3724 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3725 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3726 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3727
3728 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3729 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3730 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3731
3732 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3733 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3734 @end table
3735
3736 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3737
3738 @table @code
3739 @findex EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3740 @item EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS ()
3741 If defined, is a C expression that produces the machine-specific code
3742 for a call to @code{__builtin_saveregs}. This code will be moved to the
3743 very beginning of the function, before any parameter access are made.
3744 The return value of this function should be an RTX that contains the
3745 value to use as the return of @code{__builtin_saveregs}.
3746
3747 @findex SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3748 @item SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS (@var{args_so_far}, @var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{pretend_args_size}, @var{second_time})
3749 This macro offers an alternative to using @code{__builtin_saveregs} and
3750 defining the macro @code{EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. Use it to store the
3751 anonymous register arguments into the stack so that all the arguments
3752 appear to have been passed consecutively on the stack. Once this is
3753 done, you can use the standard implementation of varargs that works for
3754 machines that pass all their arguments on the stack.
3755
3756 The argument @var{args_so_far} is the @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} data
3757 structure, containing the values that obtain after processing of the
3758 named arguments. The arguments @var{mode} and @var{type} describe the
3759 last named argument---its machine mode and its data type as a tree node.
3760
3761 The macro implementation should do two things: first, push onto the
3762 stack all the argument registers @emph{not} used for the named
3763 arguments, and second, store the size of the data thus pushed into the
3764 @code{int}-valued variable whose name is supplied as the argument
3765 @var{pretend_args_size}. The value that you store here will serve as
3766 additional offset for setting up the stack frame.
3767
3768 Because you must generate code to push the anonymous arguments at
3769 compile time without knowing their data types,
3770 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is only useful on machines that have just
3771 a single category of argument register and use it uniformly for all data
3772 types.
3773
3774 If the argument @var{second_time} is nonzero, it means that the
3775 arguments of the function are being analyzed for the second time. This
3776 happens for an inline function, which is not actually compiled until the
3777 end of the source file. The macro @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} should
3778 not generate any instructions in this case.
3779
3780 @findex STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3781 @item STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3782 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the location where a function
3783 argument is passed depends on whether or not it is a named argument.
3784
3785 This macro controls how the @var{named} argument to @code{FUNCTION_ARG}
3786 is set for varargs and stdarg functions. If this macro returns a
3787 nonzero value, the @var{named} argument is always true for named
3788 arguments, and false for unnamed arguments. If it returns a value of
3789 zero, but @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is defined, then all arguments
3790 are treated as named. Otherwise, all named arguments except the last
3791 are treated as named.
3792
3793 You need not define this macro if it always returns zero.
3794
3795 @findex PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3796 @item PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3797 If you need to conditionally change ABIs so that one works with
3798 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS}, but the other works like neither
3799 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} nor @code{STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING} was
3800 defined, then define this macro to return nonzero if
3801 @code{SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} is used, zero otherwise.
3802 Otherwise, you should not define this macro.
3803 @end table
3804
3805 @node Trampolines
3806 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3807 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3808 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3809
3810 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3811 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3812 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3813 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3814 trampoline.
3815
3816 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3817 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3818 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3819 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3820 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3821 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3822 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3823 operands.
3824
3825 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3826 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3827 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3828 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3829 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3830 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3831 separately.
3832
3833 @table @code
3834 @findex TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3835 @item TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE (@var{file})
3836 A C statement to output, on the stream @var{file}, assembler code for a
3837 block of data that contains the constant parts of a trampoline. This
3838 code should not include a label---the label is taken care of
3839 automatically.
3840
3841 If you do not define this macro, it means no template is needed
3842 for the target. Do not define this macro on systems where the block move
3843 code to copy the trampoline into place would be larger than the code
3844 to generate it on the spot.
3845
3846 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3847 @item TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3848 The name of a subroutine to switch to the section in which the
3849 trampoline template is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is
3850 a value of @samp{readonly_data_section}, which places the trampoline in
3851 the section containing read-only data.
3852
3853 @findex TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3854 @item TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3855 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3856
3857 @findex TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3858 @item TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3859 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3860
3861 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
3862 is used for aligning trampolines.
3863
3864 @findex INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE
3865 @item INITIALIZE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{addr}, @var{fnaddr}, @var{static_chain})
3866 A C statement to initialize the variable parts of a trampoline.
3867 @var{addr} is an RTX for the address of the trampoline; @var{fnaddr} is
3868 an RTX for the address of the nested function; @var{static_chain} is an
3869 RTX for the static chain value that should be passed to the function
3870 when it is called.
3871
3872 @findex ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE
3873 @item ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE (@var{fp})
3874 A C expression to allocate run-time space for a trampoline. The
3875 expression value should be an RTX representing a memory reference to the
3876 space for the trampoline.
3877
3878 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} and trampolines
3879 @cindex @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and trampolines
3880 If this macro is not defined, by default the trampoline is allocated as
3881 a stack slot. This default is right for most machines. The exceptions
3882 are machines where it is impossible to execute instructions in the stack
3883 area. On such machines, you may have to implement a separate stack,
3884 using this macro in conjunction with @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
3885 @code{FUNCTION_EPILOGUE}.
3886
3887 @var{fp} points to a data structure, a @code{struct function}, which
3888 describes the compilation status of the immediate containing function of
3889 the function which the trampoline is for. Normally (when
3890 @code{ALLOCATE_TRAMPOLINE} is not defined), the stack slot for the
3891 trampoline is in the stack frame of this containing function. Other
3892 allocation strategies probably must do something analogous with this
3893 information.
3894 @end table
3895
3896 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3897 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3898 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3899 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3900
3901 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3902 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3903 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3904 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3905 latter makes initialization faster.
3906
3907 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3908 the following macros which describe the shape of the cache.
3909
3910 @table @code
3911 @findex INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3912 @item INSN_CACHE_SIZE
3913 The total size in bytes of the cache.
3914
3915 @findex INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3916 @item INSN_CACHE_LINE_WIDTH
3917 The length in bytes of each cache line. The cache is divided into cache
3918 lines which are disjoint slots, each holding a contiguous chunk of data
3919 fetched from memory. Each time data is brought into the cache, an
3920 entire line is read at once. The data loaded into a cache line is
3921 always aligned on a boundary equal to the line size.
3922
3923 @findex INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3924 @item INSN_CACHE_DEPTH
3925 The number of alternative cache lines that can hold any particular memory
3926 location.
3927 @end table
3928
3929 Alternatively, if the machine has system calls or instructions to clear
3930 the instruction cache directly, you can define the following macro.
3931
3932 @table @code
3933 @findex CLEAR_INSN_CACHE
3934 @item CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{BEG}, @var{END})
3935 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3936 cache} in the specified interval. If it is not defined, and the macro
3937 INSN_CACHE_SIZE is defined, some generic code is generated to clear the
3938 cache. The definition of this macro would typically be a series of
3939 @code{asm} statements. Both @var{BEG} and @var{END} are both pointer
3940 expressions.
3941 @end table
3942
3943 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3944 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3945 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3946 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3947 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3948
3949 @table @code
3950 @findex TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3951 @item TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3952 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3953 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3954 which will be compiled with GCC. They go in a library function named
3955 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3956
3957 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3958 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3959 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3960 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3961 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3962 special assembler code.
3963 @end table
3964
3965 @node Library Calls
3966 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3967 @cindex library subroutine names
3968 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3969
3970 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3971 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3972
3973 @table @code
3974 @findex MULSI3_LIBCALL
3975 @item MULSI3_LIBCALL
3976 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3977 multiplication of one signed full-word by another. If you do not
3978 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__mulsi3},
3979 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3980
3981 @findex DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3982 @item DIVSI3_LIBCALL
3983 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3984 division of one signed full-word by another. If you do not define
3985 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divsi3}, a
3986 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3987
3988 @findex UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3989 @item UDIVSI3_LIBCALL
3990 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
3991 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
3992 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivsi3}, a
3993 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
3994
3995 @findex MODSI3_LIBCALL
3996 @item MODSI3_LIBCALL
3997 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
3998 remainder in division of one signed full-word by another. If you do
3999 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4000 @code{__modsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4001
4002 @findex UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4003 @item UMODSI3_LIBCALL
4004 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4005 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4006 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4007 @code{__umodsi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4008
4009 @findex MULDI3_LIBCALL
4010 @item MULDI3_LIBCALL
4011 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4012 multiplication of one signed double-word by another. If you do not
4013 define this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__muldi3},
4014 a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4015
4016 @findex DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4017 @item DIVDI3_LIBCALL
4018 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4019 division of one signed double-word by another. If you do not define
4020 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__divdi3}, a
4021 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4022
4023 @findex UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4024 @item UDIVDI3_LIBCALL
4025 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for
4026 division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do not define
4027 this macro, the default name is used, which is @code{__udivdi3}, a
4028 function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4029
4030 @findex MODDI3_LIBCALL
4031 @item MODDI3_LIBCALL
4032 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4033 remainder in division of one signed double-word by another. If you do
4034 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4035 @code{__moddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4036
4037 @findex UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4038 @item UMODDI3_LIBCALL
4039 A C string constant giving the name of the function to call for the
4040 remainder in division of one unsigned full-word by another. If you do
4041 not define this macro, the default name is used, which is
4042 @code{__umoddi3}, a function defined in @file{libgcc.a}.
4043
4044 @findex INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4045 @item INIT_TARGET_OPTABS
4046 Define this macro as a C statement that declares additional library
4047 routines renames existing ones. @code{init_optabs} calls this macro after
4048 initializing all the normal library routines.
4049
4050 @findex FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
4051 @item FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL
4052 Define this macro as a C statement that returns nonzero if a call to
4053 the floating point comparison library function will return a boolean
4054 value that indicates the result of the comparison. It should return
4055 zero if one of gcc's own libgcc functions is called.
4056
4057 Most ports don't need to define this macro.
4058
4059 @findex TARGET_EDOM
4060 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4061 @item TARGET_EDOM
4062 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4063 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4064 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4065 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4066 system.
4067
4068 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4069 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4070 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4071 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4072 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4073
4074 @findex GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4075 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4076 @item GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4077 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4078 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4079 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4080 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4081
4082 @findex TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4083 @cindex @code{bcopy}, implicit usage
4084 @cindex @code{memcpy}, implicit usage
4085 @cindex @code{bzero}, implicit usage
4086 @cindex @code{memset}, implicit usage
4087 @item TARGET_MEM_FUNCTIONS
4088 Define this macro if GCC should generate calls to the System V
4089 (and ANSI C) library functions @code{memcpy} and @code{memset}
4090 rather than the BSD functions @code{bcopy} and @code{bzero}.
4091
4092 @findex LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4093 @item LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE
4094 Define this macro if only @code{float} arguments cannot be passed to
4095 library routines (so they must be converted to @code{double}). This
4096 macro affects both how library calls are generated and how the library
4097 routines in @file{libgcc1.c} accept their arguments. It is useful on
4098 machines where floating and fixed point arguments are passed
4099 differently, such as the i860.
4100
4101 @findex FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4102 @item FLOAT_ARG_TYPE
4103 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4104 pick up arguments of type @code{float}. (By default, they use a union
4105 of @code{float} and @code{int}.)
4106
4107 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4108 traditional C compilers that expect all arguments declared as @code{float}
4109 to arrive as @code{double}. To avoid this conversion, the library routines
4110 ask for the value as some other type and then treat it as a @code{float}.
4111
4112 On some systems, no other type will work for this. For these systems,
4113 you must use @code{LIBGCC_NEEDS_DOUBLE} instead, to force conversion of
4114 the values @code{double} before they are passed.
4115
4116 @findex FLOATIFY
4117 @item FLOATIFY (@var{passed-value})
4118 Define this macro to override the way library routines redesignate a
4119 @code{float} argument as a @code{float} instead of the type it was
4120 passed as. The default is an expression which takes the @code{float}
4121 field of the union.
4122
4123 @findex FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4124 @item FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE
4125 Define this macro to override the type used by the library routines to
4126 return values that ought to have type @code{float}. (By default, they
4127 use @code{int}.)
4128
4129 The obvious choice would be @code{float}---but that won't work with
4130 traditional C compilers gratuitously convert values declared as
4131 @code{float} into @code{double}.
4132
4133 @findex INTIFY
4134 @item INTIFY (@var{float-value})
4135 Define this macro to override the way the value of a
4136 @code{float}-returning library routine should be packaged in order to
4137 return it. These functions are actually declared to return type
4138 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} (normally @code{int}).
4139
4140 These values can't be returned as type @code{float} because traditional
4141 C compilers would gratuitously convert the value to a @code{double}.
4142
4143 A local variable named @code{intify} is always available when the macro
4144 @code{INTIFY} is used. It is a union of a @code{float} field named
4145 @code{f} and a field named @code{i} whose type is
4146 @code{FLOAT_VALUE_TYPE} or @code{int}.
4147
4148 If you don't define this macro, the default definition works by copying
4149 the value through that union.
4150
4151 @findex nongcc_SI_type
4152 @item nongcc_SI_type
4153 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to
4154 @code{SImode} in the system's own C compiler.
4155
4156 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4157 is.
4158
4159 @findex nongcc_word_type
4160 @item nongcc_word_type
4161 Define this macro as the name of the data type corresponding to the
4162 word_mode in the system's own C compiler.
4163
4164 You need not define this macro if that type is @code{long int}, as it usually
4165 is.
4166
4167 @findex perform_@dots{}
4168 @item perform_@dots{}
4169 Define these macros to supply explicit C statements to carry out various
4170 arithmetic operations on types @code{float} and @code{double} in the
4171 library routines in @file{libgcc1.c}. See that file for a full list
4172 of these macros and their arguments.
4173
4174 On most machines, you don't need to define any of these macros, because
4175 the C compiler that comes with the system takes care of doing them.
4176
4177 @findex NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4178 @item NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4179 Define this macro to generate code for Objective C message sending using
4180 the calling convention of the NeXT system. This calling convention
4181 involves passing the object, the selector and the method arguments all
4182 at once to the method-lookup library function.
4183
4184 The default calling convention passes just the object and the selector
4185 to the lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4186 @end table
4187
4188 @node Addressing Modes
4189 @section Addressing Modes
4190 @cindex addressing modes
4191
4192 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4193 This is about addressing modes.
4194
4195 @table @code
4196 @findex HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4197 @item HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4198 A C expression that is nonzero the machine supports post-increment addressing.
4199
4200 @findex HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4201 @findex HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4202 @findex HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4203 @item HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4204 @itemx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4205 @itemx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4206 Similar for other kinds of addressing.
4207
4208 @findex CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P
4209 @item CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4210 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4211 is a valid address. On most machines, this can be defined as
4212 @code{CONSTANT_P (@var{x})}, but a few machines are more restrictive
4213 in which constant addresses are supported.
4214
4215 @findex CONSTANT_P
4216 @code{CONSTANT_P} accepts integer-values expressions whose values are
4217 not explicitly known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and
4218 @code{high} expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in
4219 addition to @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4220
4221 @findex MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4222 @item MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4223 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4224 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4225 the maximum number that @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} would ever
4226 accept.
4227
4228 @findex GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS
4229 @item GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{label})
4230 A C compound statement with a conditional @code{goto @var{label};}
4231 executed if @var{x} (an RTX) is a legitimate memory address on the
4232 target machine for a memory operand of mode @var{mode}.
4233
4234 It usually pays to define several simpler macros to serve as
4235 subroutines for this one. Otherwise it may be too complicated to
4236 understand.
4237
4238 This macro must exist in two variants: a strict variant and a
4239 non-strict one. The strict variant is used in the reload pass. It
4240 must be defined so that any pseudo-register that has not been
4241 allocated a hard register is considered a memory reference. In
4242 contexts where some kind of register is required, a pseudo-register
4243 with no hard register must be rejected.
4244
4245 The non-strict variant is used in other passes. It must be defined to
4246 accept all pseudo-registers in every context where some kind of
4247 register is required.
4248
4249 @findex REG_OK_STRICT
4250 Compiler source files that want to use the strict variant of this
4251 macro define the macro @code{REG_OK_STRICT}. You should use an
4252 @code{#ifdef REG_OK_STRICT} conditional to define the strict variant
4253 in that case and the non-strict variant otherwise.
4254
4255 Subroutines to check for acceptable registers for various purposes (one
4256 for base registers, one for index registers, and so on) are typically
4257 among the subroutines used to define @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS}.
4258 Then only these subroutine macros need have two variants; the higher
4259 levels of macros may be the same whether strict or not.@refill
4260
4261 Normally, constant addresses which are the sum of a @code{symbol_ref}
4262 and an integer are stored inside a @code{const} RTX to mark them as
4263 constant. Therefore, there is no need to recognize such sums
4264 specifically as legitimate addresses. Normally you would simply
4265 recognize any @code{const} as legitimate.
4266
4267 Usually @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS} is not prepared to handle constant
4268 sums that are not marked with @code{const}. It assumes that a naked
4269 @code{plus} indicates indexing. If so, then you @emph{must} reject such
4270 naked constant sums as illegitimate addresses, so that none of them will
4271 be given to @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4272
4273 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} and address validation
4274 On some machines, whether a symbolic address is legitimate depends on
4275 the section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the
4276 macro @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
4277 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. When you see a
4278 @code{const}, you will have to look inside it to find the
4279 @code{symbol_ref} in order to determine the section. @xref{Assembler
4280 Format}.
4281
4282 @findex saveable_obstack
4283 The best way to modify the name string is by adding text to the
4284 beginning, with suitable punctuation to prevent any ambiguity. Allocate
4285 the new name in @code{saveable_obstack}. You will have to modify
4286 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to remove and decode the added text and
4287 output the name accordingly, and define @code{STRIP_NAME_ENCODING} to
4288 access the original name string.
4289
4290 You can check the information stored here into the @code{symbol_ref} in
4291 the definitions of the macros @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and
4292 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}.
4293
4294 @findex REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4295 @item REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x})
4296 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4297 RTX) is valid for use as a base register. For hard registers, it
4298 should always accept those which the hardware permits and reject the
4299 others. Whether the macro accepts or rejects pseudo registers must be
4300 controlled by @code{REG_OK_STRICT} as described above. This usually
4301 requires two variant definitions, of which @code{REG_OK_STRICT}
4302 controls the one actually used.
4303
4304 @findex REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P
4305 @item REG_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{x}, @var{mode})
4306 A C expression that is just like @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
4307 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
4308 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
4309 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
4310 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
4311 @code{REG_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
4312
4313 @findex REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P
4314 @item REG_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{x})
4315 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} (assumed to be a @code{reg}
4316 RTX) is valid for use as an index register.
4317
4318 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
4319 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
4320 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
4321 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
4322 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
4323 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
4324 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
4325 only if neither labeling works.
4326
4327 @findex LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4328 @item LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{oldx}, @var{mode}, @var{win})
4329 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x} with a valid
4330 memory address for an operand of mode @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a
4331 C statement label elsewhere in the code; the macro definition may use
4332
4333 @example
4334 GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS (@var{mode}, @var{x}, @var{win});
4335 @end example
4336
4337 @noindent
4338 to avoid further processing if the address has become legitimate.
4339
4340 @findex break_out_memory_refs
4341 @var{x} will always be the result of a call to @code{break_out_memory_refs},
4342 and @var{oldx} will be the operand that was given to that function to produce
4343 @var{x}.
4344
4345 The code generated by this macro should not alter the substructure of
4346 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4347 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4348
4349 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4350 address. The compiler has standard ways of doing so in all cases. In
4351 fact, it is safe for this macro to do nothing. But often a
4352 machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4353
4354 @findex LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS
4355 @item LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4356 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4357 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4358 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4359 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4360 performance reasons.
4361
4362 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4363 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4364 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4365 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4366 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4367 LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4368 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4369 be shared.
4370
4371 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4372 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4373 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4374 of reload internals.
4375
4376 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4377 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4378 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4379
4380 @findex push_reload
4381 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4382 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4383 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4384
4385 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4386 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4387 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4388 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4389 @code{push_reload}.
4390
4391 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4392 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4393 the address has become legitimate.
4394
4395 @findex copy_rtx
4396 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4397 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that is unshares only a
4398 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4399 top level, you'll need to replace first the top leve
4400 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4401 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4402
4403 @findex GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS
4404 @item GO_IF_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS (@var{addr}, @var{label})
4405 A C statement or compound statement with a conditional @code{goto
4406 @var{label};} executed if memory address @var{x} (an RTX) can have
4407 different meanings depending on the machine mode of the memory
4408 reference it is used for or if the address is valid for some modes
4409 but not others.
4410
4411 Autoincrement and autodecrement addresses typically have mode-dependent
4412 effects because the amount of the increment or decrement is the size
4413 of the operand being addressed. Some machines have other mode-dependent
4414 addresses. Many RISC machines have no mode-dependent addresses.
4415
4416 You may assume that @var{addr} is a valid address for the machine.
4417
4418 @findex LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4419 @item LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4420 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate constant for
4421 an immediate operand on the target machine. You can assume that
4422 @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not check this. In fact,
4423 @samp{1} is a suitable definition for this macro on machines where
4424 anything @code{CONSTANT_P} is valid.@refill
4425 @end table
4426
4427 @node Condition Code
4428 @section Condition Code Status
4429 @cindex condition code status
4430
4431 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4432 This describes the condition code status.
4433
4434 @findex cc_status
4435 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4436 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4437 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4438 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4439 currently based, and several standard flags.
4440
4441 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4442 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4443 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4444
4445 @table @code
4446 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP
4447 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP
4448 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4449 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4450
4451 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4452
4453 @findex CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4454 @item CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4455 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4456 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4457 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4458 define this macro to initialize it.
4459
4460 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4461
4462 @findex NOTICE_UPDATE_CC
4463 @item NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4464 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4465 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4466 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4467 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4468 set @code{(cc0)}.
4469
4470 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4471
4472 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4473 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4474 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4475 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4476 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4477 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4478 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4479 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4480 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4481 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4482 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4483 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4484 condition code value.
4485
4486 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4487 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4488 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4489 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4490 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4491 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4492 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4493
4494 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4495 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4496 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4497 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4498
4499 @findex EXTRA_CC_MODES
4500 @item EXTRA_CC_MODES
4501 A list of additional modes for condition code values in registers
4502 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}). This macro should expand to a sequence of
4503 calls of the macro @code{CC} separated by white space. @code{CC} takes
4504 two arguments. The first is the enumeration name of the mode, which
4505 should begin with @samp{CC} and end with @samp{mode}. The second is a C
4506 string giving the printable name of the mode; it should be the same as
4507 the first argument, but with the trailing @samp{mode} removed.
4508
4509 You should only define this macro if additional modes are required.
4510
4511 A sample definition of @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is:
4512 @smallexample
4513 #define EXTRA_CC_MODES \
4514 CC(CC_NOOVmode, "CC_NOOV") \
4515 CC(CCFPmode, "CCFP") \
4516 CC(CCFPEmode, "CCFPE")
4517 @end smallexample
4518
4519 @findex SELECT_CC_MODE
4520 @item SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4521 Returns a mode from class @code{MODE_CC} to be used when comparison
4522 operation code @var{op} is applied to rtx @var{x} and @var{y}. For
4523 example, on the Sparc, @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} is defined as (see
4524 @pxref{Jump Patterns} for a description of the reason for this
4525 definition)
4526
4527 @smallexample
4528 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4529 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4530 ? ((OP == EQ || OP == NE) ? CCFPmode : CCFPEmode) \
4531 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4532 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG) \
4533 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4534 @end smallexample
4535
4536 You need not define this macro if @code{EXTRA_CC_MODES} is not defined.
4537
4538 @findex CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4539 @item CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON (@var{code}, @var{op0}, @var{op1})
4540 One some machines not all possible comparisons are defined, but you can
4541 convert an invalid comparison into a valid one. For example, the Alpha
4542 does not have a @code{GT} comparison, but you can use an @code{LT}
4543 comparison instead and swap the order of the operands.
4544
4545 On such machines, define this macro to be a C statement to do any
4546 required conversions. @var{code} is the initial comparison code
4547 and @var{op0} and @var{op1} are the left and right operands of the
4548 comparison, respectively. You should modify @var{code}, @var{op0}, and
4549 @var{op1} as required.
4550
4551 GCC will not assume that the comparison resulting from this macro is
4552 valid but will see if the resulting insn matches a pattern in the
4553 @file{md} file.
4554
4555 You need not define this macro if it would never change the comparison
4556 code or operands.
4557
4558 @findex REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE
4559 @item REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4560 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4561 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4562 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4563 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4564
4565 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4566 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4567 For example, here is the definition used on the Sparc, where floating-point
4568 inequality comparisons are always given @code{CCFPEmode}:
4569
4570 @smallexample
4571 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) ((MODE) != CCFPEmode)
4572 @end smallexample
4573
4574 @end table
4575
4576 @node Costs
4577 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4578 @cindex costs of instructions
4579 @cindex relative costs
4580 @cindex speed of instructions
4581
4582 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4583 on the target machine.
4584
4585 @table @code
4586 @findex CONST_COSTS
4587 @item CONST_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4588 A part of a C @code{switch} statement that describes the relative costs
4589 of constant RTL expressions. It must contain @code{case} labels for
4590 expression codes @code{const_int}, @code{const}, @code{symbol_ref},
4591 @code{label_ref} and @code{const_double}. Each case must ultimately
4592 reach a @code{return} statement to return the relative cost of the use
4593 of that kind of constant value in an expression. The cost may depend on
4594 the precise value of the constant, which is available for examination in
4595 @var{x}, and the rtx code of the expression in which it is contained,
4596 found in @var{outer_code}.
4597
4598 @var{code} is the expression code---redundant, since it can be
4599 obtained with @code{GET_CODE (@var{x})}.
4600
4601 @findex RTX_COSTS
4602 @findex COSTS_N_INSNS
4603 @item RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4604 Like @code{CONST_COSTS} but applies to nonconstant RTL expressions.
4605 This can be used, for example, to indicate how costly a multiply
4606 instruction is. In writing this macro, you can use the construct
4607 @code{COSTS_N_INSNS (@var{n})} to specify a cost equal to @var{n} fast
4608 instructions. @var{outer_code} is the code of the expression in which
4609 @var{x} is contained.
4610
4611 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4612 are adequate for the target machine.
4613
4614 @findex DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS
4615 @item DEFAULT_RTX_COSTS (@var{x}, @var{code}, @var{outer_code})
4616 This macro, if defined, is called for any case not handled by the
4617 @code{RTX_COSTS} or @code{CONST_COSTS} macros. This eliminates the need
4618 to put case labels into the macro, but the code, or any functions it
4619 calls, must assume that the RTL in @var{x} could be of any type that has
4620 not already been handled. The arguments are the same as for
4621 @code{RTX_COSTS}, and the macro should execute a return statement giving
4622 the cost of any RTL expressions that it can handle. The default cost
4623 calculation is used for any RTL for which this macro does not return a
4624 value.
4625
4626 This macro is optional; do not define it if the default cost assumptions
4627 are adequate for the target machine.
4628
4629 @findex ADDRESS_COST
4630 @item ADDRESS_COST (@var{address})
4631 An expression giving the cost of an addressing mode that contains
4632 @var{address}. If not defined, the cost is computed from
4633 the @var{address} expression and the @code{CONST_COSTS} values.
4634
4635 For most CISC machines, the default cost is a good approximation of the
4636 true cost of the addressing mode. However, on RISC machines, all
4637 instructions normally have the same length and execution time. Hence
4638 all addresses will have equal costs.
4639
4640 In cases where more than one form of an address is known, the form with
4641 the lowest cost will be used. If multiple forms have the same, lowest,
4642 cost, the one that is the most complex will be used.
4643
4644 For example, suppose an address that is equal to the sum of a register
4645 and a constant is used twice in the same basic block. When this macro
4646 is not defined, the address will be computed in a register and memory
4647 references will be indirect through that register. On machines where
4648 the cost of the addressing mode containing the sum is no higher than
4649 that of a simple indirect reference, this will produce an additional
4650 instruction and possibly require an additional register. Proper
4651 specification of this macro eliminates this overhead for such machines.
4652
4653 Similar use of this macro is made in strength reduction of loops.
4654
4655 @var{address} need not be valid as an address. In such a case, the cost
4656 is not relevant and can be any value; invalid addresses need not be
4657 assigned a different cost.
4658
4659 On machines where an address involving more than one register is as
4660 cheap as an address computation involving only one register, defining
4661 @code{ADDRESS_COST} to reflect this can cause two registers to be live
4662 over a region of code where only one would have been if
4663 @code{ADDRESS_COST} were not defined in that manner. This effect should
4664 be considered in the definition of this macro. Equivalent costs should
4665 probably only be given to addresses with different numbers of registers
4666 on machines with lots of registers.
4667
4668 This macro will normally either not be defined or be defined as a
4669 constant.
4670
4671 @findex REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4672 @item REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{from}, @var{to})
4673 A C expression for the cost of moving data from a register in class
4674 @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are expressed using
4675 the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A value of 2 is the
4676 default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4677
4678 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4679 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4680 registers if they are not general registers.
4681
4682 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4683 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4684 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4685 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4686 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4687 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4688
4689 @findex MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4690 @item MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4691 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4692 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4693 is to be written to memory, non-zero if it is to be read in. This cost
4694 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4695 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4696 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4697
4698 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4699 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4700 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4701 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4702 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4703 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4704
4705 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4706 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4707 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4708 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4709 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4710 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4711 are the same as to this macro.
4712
4713 @findex BRANCH_COST
4714 @item BRANCH_COST
4715 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4716 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that.
4717 @end table
4718
4719 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4720 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4721 ordinarily expect.
4722
4723 @table @code
4724 @findex SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4725 @item SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4726 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4727 than a word of memory (i.e. a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4728 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4729 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4730 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4731
4732 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4733 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4734 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4735 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4736 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4737 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4738
4739 @findex SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4740 @item SLOW_ZERO_EXTEND
4741 Define this macro if zero-extension (of a @code{char} or @code{short}
4742 to an @code{int}) can be done faster if the destination is a register
4743 that is known to be zero.
4744
4745 If you define this macro, you must have instruction patterns that
4746 recognize RTL structures like this:
4747
4748 @smallexample
4749 (set (strict_low_part (subreg:QI (reg:SI @dots{}) 0)) @dots{})
4750 @end smallexample
4751
4752 @noindent
4753 and likewise for @code{HImode}.
4754
4755 @findex SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4756 @item SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS
4757 Define this macro to be the value 1 if unaligned accesses have a cost
4758 many times greater than aligned accesses, for example if they are
4759 emulated in a trap handler.
4760
4761 When this macro is non-zero, the compiler will act as if
4762 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were non-zero when generating code for block
4763 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4764 Therefore, do not set this macro non-zero if unaligned accesses only add a
4765 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4766
4767 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined.
4768
4769 @findex DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4770 @item DONT_REDUCE_ADDR
4771 Define this macro to inhibit strength reduction of memory addresses.
4772 (On some machines, such strength reduction seems to do harm rather
4773 than good.)
4774
4775 @findex MOVE_RATIO
4776 @item MOVE_RATIO
4777 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4778 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4779 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4780 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4781
4782 Note that on machines with no memory-to-memory move insns, this macro denotes
4783 the corresponding number of memory-to-memory @emph{sequences}.
4784
4785 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4786
4787 @findex MOVE_BY_PIECES_P
4788 @item MOVE_BY_PIECES_P (@var{size}, @var{alignment})
4789 A C expression used to determine whether @code{move_by_pieces} will be used to
4790 copy a chunk of memory, or whether some other block move mechanism
4791 will be used. Defaults to 1 if @code{move_by_pieces_ninsns} returns less
4792 than @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4793
4794 @findex MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4795 @item MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4796 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4797 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4798
4799 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT
4800 @item USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4801 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4802 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4803 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4804
4805 @findex USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT
4806 @item USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4807 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4808 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4809 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4810
4811 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT
4812 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4813 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4814 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4815 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4816
4817 @findex USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT
4818 @item USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4819 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4820 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4821 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4822
4823 @findex USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT
4824 @item USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4825 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4826 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4827 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4828
4829 @findex USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT
4830 @item USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4831 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdeccrement is a good
4832 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4833 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4834
4835 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT
4836 @item USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4837 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4838 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4839 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4840
4841 @findex USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT
4842 @item USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4843 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4844 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4845 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4846
4847 @findex NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4848 @item NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4849 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4850 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4851
4852 @findex NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4853 @item NO_RECURSIVE_FUNCTION_CSE
4854 Define this macro if it is as good or better for a function to call
4855 itself with an explicit address than to call an address kept in a
4856 register.
4857
4858 @findex ADJUST_COST
4859 @item ADJUST_COST (@var{insn}, @var{link}, @var{dep_insn}, @var{cost})
4860 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer variable @var{cost}
4861 based on the relationship between @var{insn} that is dependent on
4862 @var{dep_insn} through the dependence @var{link}. The default is to
4863 make no adjustment to @var{cost}. This can be used for example to
4864 specify to the scheduler that an output- or anti-dependence does not
4865 incur the same cost as a data-dependence.
4866
4867 @findex ADJUST_PRIORITY
4868 @item ADJUST_PRIORITY (@var{insn})
4869 A C statement (sans semicolon) to update the integer scheduling
4870 priority @code{INSN_PRIORITY(@var{insn})}. Reduce the priority
4871 to execute the @var{insn} earlier, increase the priority to execute
4872 @var{insn} later. Do not define this macro if you do not need to
4873 adjust the scheduling priorities of insns.
4874 @end table
4875
4876 @node Sections
4877 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4878 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4879 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4880
4881 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4882 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4883 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4884 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4885 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4886 of sections.
4887
4888 The compiler must tell the assembler when to switch sections. These
4889 macros control what commands to output to tell the assembler this. You
4890 can also define additional sections.
4891
4892 @table @code
4893 @findex TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4894 @item TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4895 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4896 operation that should precede instructions and read-only data. Normally
4897 @code{".text"} is right.
4898
4899 @findex DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4900 @item DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4901 A C expression whose value is a string containing the assembler
4902 operation to identify the following data as writable initialized data.
4903 Normally @code{".data"} is right.
4904
4905 @findex SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4906 @item SHARED_SECTION_ASM_OP
4907 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4908 assembler operation to identify the following data as shared data. If
4909 not defined, @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP} will be used.
4910
4911 @findex BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4912 @item BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4913 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4914 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4915 data. If not defined, and neither @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} nor
4916 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are defined, uninitialized global data will be
4917 output in the data section if @samp{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise
4918 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be used.
4919
4920 @findex SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4921 @item SHARED_BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4922 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4923 assembler operation to identify the following data as uninitialized global
4924 shared data. If not defined, and @code{BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP} is, the latter
4925 will be used.
4926
4927 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4928 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4929 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4930 assembler operation to identify the following data as initialization
4931 code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does not
4932 exist.
4933
4934 @findex EXTRA_SECTIONS
4935 @findex in_text
4936 @findex in_data
4937 @item EXTRA_SECTIONS
4938 A list of names for sections other than the standard two, which are
4939 @code{in_text} and @code{in_data}. You need not define this macro
4940 on a system with no other sections (that GCC needs to use).
4941
4942 @findex EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4943 @findex text_section
4944 @findex data_section
4945 @item EXTRA_SECTION_FUNCTIONS
4946 One or more functions to be defined in @file{varasm.c}. These
4947 functions should do jobs analogous to those of @code{text_section} and
4948 @code{data_section}, for your additional sections. Do not define this
4949 macro if you do not define @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}.
4950
4951 @findex READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4952 @item READONLY_DATA_SECTION
4953 On most machines, read-only variables, constants, and jump tables are
4954 placed in the text section. If this is not the case on your machine,
4955 this macro should be defined to be the name of a function (either
4956 @code{data_section} or a function defined in @code{EXTRA_SECTIONS}) that
4957 switches to the section to be used for read-only items.
4958
4959 If these items should be placed in the text section, this macro should
4960 not be defined.
4961
4962 @findex SELECT_SECTION
4963 @item SELECT_SECTION (@var{exp}, @var{reloc})
4964 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4965 output of @var{exp}. You can assume that @var{exp} is either a
4966 @code{VAR_DECL} node or a constant of some sort. @var{reloc}
4967 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
4968 relocations. Select the section by calling @code{text_section} or one
4969 of the alternatives for other sections.
4970
4971 Do not define this macro if you put all read-only variables and
4972 constants in the read-only data section (usually the text section).
4973
4974 @findex SELECT_RTX_SECTION
4975 @item SELECT_RTX_SECTION (@var{mode}, @var{rtx})
4976 A C statement or statements to switch to the appropriate section for
4977 output of @var{rtx} in mode @var{mode}. You can assume that @var{rtx}
4978 is some kind of constant in RTL. The argument @var{mode} is redundant
4979 except in the case of a @code{const_int} rtx. Select the section by
4980 calling @code{text_section} or one of the alternatives for other
4981 sections.
4982
4983 Do not define this macro if you put all constants in the read-only
4984 data section.
4985
4986 @findex JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4987 @item JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4988 Define this macro to be an expression with a non-zero value if jump
4989 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4990 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4991 readonly data section is used.
4992
4993 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4994
4995 @findex ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
4996 @item ENCODE_SECTION_INFO (@var{decl})
4997 Define this macro if references to a symbol must be treated differently
4998 depending on something about the variable or function named by the
4999 symbol (such as what section it is in).
5000
5001 The macro definition, if any, is executed immediately after the rtl for
5002 @var{decl} has been created and stored in @code{DECL_RTL (@var{decl})}.
5003 The value of the rtl will be a @code{mem} whose address is a
5004 @code{symbol_ref}.
5005
5006 @cindex @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}, in @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}
5007 The usual thing for this macro to do is to record a flag in the
5008 @code{symbol_ref} (such as @code{SYMBOL_REF_FLAG}) or to store a
5009 modified name string in the @code{symbol_ref} (if one bit is not enough
5010 information).
5011
5012 @findex STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5013 @item STRIP_NAME_ENCODING (@var{var}, @var{sym_name})
5014 Decode @var{sym_name} and store the real name part in @var{var}, sans
5015 the characters that encode section info. Define this macro if
5016 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} alters the symbol's name string.
5017
5018 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION_P
5019 @item UNIQUE_SECTION_P (@var{decl})
5020 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{decl} should be placed
5021 into a unique section for some target-specific reason. If you do not
5022 define this macro, the default is @samp{0}. Note that the flag
5023 @samp{-ffunction-sections} will also cause functions to be placed into
5024 unique sections.
5025
5026 @findex UNIQUE_SECTION
5027 @item UNIQUE_SECTION (@var{decl}, @var{reloc})
5028 A C statement to build up a unique section name, expressed as a
5029 STRING_CST node, and assign it to @samp{DECL_SECTION_NAME (@var{decl})}.
5030 @var{reloc} indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires
5031 link-time relocations. If you do not define this macro, GCC will use
5032 the symbol name prefixed by @samp{.} as the section name.
5033 @end table
5034
5035 @node PIC
5036 @section Position Independent Code
5037 @cindex position independent code
5038 @cindex PIC
5039
5040 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5041 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5042 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the macros
5043 @code{GO_IF_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS} and @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as
5044 well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You must modify the definition of
5045 @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate when the source operand
5046 contains a symbolic address. You may also need to alter the handling of
5047 switch statements so that they use relative addresses.
5048 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5049 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5050
5051 @table @code
5052 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5053 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5054 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5055 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5056 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI). When this macro
5057 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5058 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5059 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5060 necessary).
5061
5062 @findex PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5063 @item PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5064 Define this macro if the register defined by
5065 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. Do not define
5066 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5067
5068 @findex FINALIZE_PIC
5069 @item FINALIZE_PIC
5070 By generating position-independent code, when two different programs (A
5071 and B) share a common library (libC.a), the text of the library can be
5072 shared whether or not the library is linked at the same address for both
5073 programs. In some of these environments, position-independent code
5074 requires not only the use of different addressing modes, but also
5075 special code to enable the use of these addressing modes.
5076
5077 The @code{FINALIZE_PIC} macro serves as a hook to emit these special
5078 codes once the function is being compiled into assembly code, but not
5079 before. (It is not done before, because in the case of compiling an
5080 inline function, it would lead to multiple PIC prologues being
5081 included in functions which used inline functions and were compiled to
5082 assembly language.)
5083
5084 @findex LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P
5085 @item LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5086 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5087 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5088 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5089 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5090 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5091 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5092 position independent code.
5093 @end table
5094
5095 @node Assembler Format
5096 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5097
5098 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5099 to write instructions in assembler language--rather than what the
5100 instructions do.
5101
5102 @menu
5103 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5104 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5105 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5106 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5107 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5108 and termination routines.
5109 * Macros for Initialization::
5110 Specific macros that control the handling of
5111 initialization and termination routines.
5112 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5113 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5114 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5115 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5116 @end menu
5117
5118 @node File Framework
5119 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5120 @cindex assembler format
5121 @cindex output of assembler code
5122
5123 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5124 This describes the overall framework of an assembler file.
5125
5126 @table @code
5127 @findex ASM_FILE_START
5128 @item ASM_FILE_START (@var{stream})
5129 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5130 some appropriate text to go at the start of an assembler file.
5131
5132 Normally this macro is defined to output a line containing
5133 @samp{#NO_APP}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5134 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it can save time by not
5135 checking for certain assembler constructs.
5136
5137 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5138 see @file{attasm.h}.
5139
5140 @findex ASM_FILE_END
5141 @item ASM_FILE_END (@var{stream})
5142 A C expression which outputs to the stdio stream @var{stream}
5143 some appropriate text to go at the end of an assembler file.
5144
5145 If this macro is not defined, the default is to output nothing
5146 special at the end of the file. Most systems don't require any
5147 definition.
5148
5149 On systems that use SDB, it is necessary to output certain commands;
5150 see @file{attasm.h}.
5151
5152 @findex ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC
5153 @item ASM_IDENTIFY_GCC (@var{file})
5154 A C statement to output assembler commands which will identify
5155 the object file as having been compiled with GCC (or another
5156 GNU compiler).
5157
5158 If you don't define this macro, the string @samp{gcc_compiled.:}
5159 is output. This string is calculated to define a symbol which,
5160 on BSD systems, will never be defined for any other reason.
5161 GDB checks for the presence of this symbol when reading the
5162 symbol table of an executable.
5163
5164 On non-BSD systems, you must arrange communication with GDB in
5165 some other fashion. If GDB is not used on your system, you can
5166 define this macro with an empty body.
5167
5168 @findex ASM_COMMENT_START
5169 @item ASM_COMMENT_START
5170 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5171 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5172 the end of the line.
5173
5174 @findex ASM_APP_ON
5175 @item ASM_APP_ON
5176 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5177 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5178 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5179 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5180 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5181
5182 @findex ASM_APP_OFF
5183 @item ASM_APP_OFF
5184 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5185 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5186 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5187 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5188
5189 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5190 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5191 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5192 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5193 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5194
5195 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5196 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5197
5198 @findex OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING
5199 @item OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5200 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5201 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5202 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5203 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5204 of the filename using this macro.
5205
5206 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE
5207 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
5208 A C statement to output DBX or SDB debugging information before code
5209 for line number @var{line} of the current source file to the
5210 stdio stream @var{stream}.
5211
5212 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of debugging
5213 information for the debugger in use is appropriate.
5214
5215 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5216 @item ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5217 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to handle a
5218 @samp{#ident} directive containing the text @var{string}. If this
5219 macro is not defined, nothing is output for a @samp{#ident} directive.
5220
5221 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME
5222 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{reloc})
5223 A C statement to output something to the assembler file to switch to section
5224 @var{name} for object @var{decl} which is either a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, a
5225 @code{VAR_DECL} or @code{NULL_TREE}. @var{reloc}
5226 indicates whether the initial value of @var{exp} requires link-time
5227 relocations. Some target formats do not support
5228 arbitrary sections. Do not define this macro in such cases.
5229
5230 At present this macro is only used to support section attributes.
5231 When this macro is undefined, section attributes are disabled.
5232
5233 @findex OBJC_PROLOGUE
5234 @item OBJC_PROLOGUE
5235 A C statement to output any assembler statements which are required to
5236 precede any Objective C object definitions or message sending. The
5237 statement is executed only when compiling an Objective C program.
5238 @end table
5239
5240 @need 2000
5241 @node Data Output
5242 @subsection Output of Data
5243
5244 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5245 This describes data output.
5246
5247 @table @code
5248 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE
5249 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE
5250 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT
5251 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5252 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5253 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5254 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_THREE_QUARTER_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5255 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5256 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE_FLOAT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5257 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5258 instruction to assemble a floating-point constant of @code{TFmode},
5259 @code{DFmode}, @code{SFmode}, @code{TQFmode}, @code{HFmode}, or
5260 @code{QFmode}, respectively, whose value is @var{value}. @var{value}
5261 will be a C expression of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. Macros such as
5262 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE} are useful for writing these
5263 definitions.
5264
5265 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT
5266 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT
5267 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INT
5268 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT
5269 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR
5270 @findex output_addr_const
5271 @item ASM_OUTPUT_QUADRUPLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5272 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5273 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_INT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5274 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_SHORT (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5275 @itemx ASM_OUTPUT_CHAR (@var{stream}, @var{exp})
5276 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5277 instruction to assemble an integer of 16, 8, 4, 2 or 1 bytes,
5278 respectively, whose value is @var{value}. The argument @var{exp} will
5279 be an RTL expression which represents a constant value. Use
5280 @samp{output_addr_const (@var{stream}, @var{exp})} to output this value
5281 as an assembler expression.@refill
5282
5283 For sizes larger than @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, if the action of a macro
5284 would be identical to repeatedly calling the macro corresponding to
5285 a size of @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}, once for each word, you need not define
5286 the macro.
5287
5288 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE
5289 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BYTE (@var{stream}, @var{value})
5290 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5291 instruction to assemble a single byte containing the number @var{value}.
5292
5293 @findex ASM_BYTE_OP
5294 @item ASM_BYTE_OP
5295 A C string constant giving the pseudo-op to use for a sequence of
5296 single-byte constants. If this macro is not defined, the default is
5297 @code{"byte"}.
5298
5299 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII
5300 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5301 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5302 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5303 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5304 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5305
5306 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5307 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5308 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5309
5310 @findex CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5311 @item CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5312 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5313 expression to have a non-zero value if GCC should output the constant
5314 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5315 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5316 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5317 pool before the function.
5318
5319 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE
5320 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5321 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5322 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5323 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5324 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5325 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5326 immediately after this call.
5327
5328 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5329 not be defined.
5330
5331 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY
5332 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5333 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5334 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5335 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5336
5337 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5338 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5339 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5340 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5341 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5342 alignment.
5343
5344 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5345 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5346 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5347 Here is how to do this:
5348
5349 @example
5350 ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5351 @end example
5352
5353 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5354 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5355 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5356
5357 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5358
5359 @findex CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P
5360 @item CONSTANT_AFTER_FUNCTION_P (@var{exp})
5361 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if the constant
5362 @var{exp}, of type @code{tree}, should be output after the code for a
5363 function. The compiler will normally output all constants before the
5364 function; you need not define this macro if this is OK.
5365
5366 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE
5367 @item ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5368 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5369 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5370 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5371 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5372 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5373
5374 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5375 define this macro.
5376
5377 @findex IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR
5378 @item IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C})
5379 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5380 used as a logical line separator by the assembler.
5381
5382 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5383 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5384
5385
5386 @findex ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5387 @findex ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5388 @item ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5389 @itemx ASM_CLOSE_PAREN
5390 These macros are defined as C string constant, describing the syntax
5391 in the assembler for grouping arithmetic expressions. The following
5392 definitions are correct for most assemblers:
5393
5394 @example
5395 #define ASM_OPEN_PAREN "("
5396 #define ASM_CLOSE_PAREN ")"
5397 @end example
5398 @end table
5399
5400 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5401 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5402
5403 @table @code
5404 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5405 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5406 @itemx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5407 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE
5408 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE
5409 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE
5410 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the target's
5411 floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in the array of
5412 @code{long int} whose address is @var{l}. The number of elements in the
5413 output array is determined by the size of the desired target floating
5414 point data type: 32 bits of it go in each @code{long int} array
5415 element. Each array element holds 32 bits of the result, even if
5416 @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits on the host machine.
5417
5418 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5419 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5420 machine's memory.
5421
5422 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL (@var{x}, @var{format}, @var{string})
5423 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_DECIMAL
5424 This macro converts @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to a
5425 decimal number and stores it as a string into @var{string}.
5426 You must pass, as @var{string}, the address of a long enough block
5427 of space to hold the result.
5428
5429 The argument @var{format} is a @code{printf}-specification that serves
5430 as a suggestion for how to format the output string.
5431 @end table
5432
5433 @node Uninitialized Data
5434 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5435
5436 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5437 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5438
5439 @table @code
5440 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON
5441 @item ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5442 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5443 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5444 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5445 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5446
5447 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5448 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5449 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5450
5451 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5452 common global variables are output.
5453
5454 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON
5455 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5456 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5457 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5458 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5459 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5460 as the number of bits.
5461
5462 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON
5463 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5464 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5465 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5466 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC wil use it
5467 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5468 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5469 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5470
5471 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON
5472 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5473 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, except that it
5474 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5475 will be used.
5476
5477 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_BSS
5478 @item ASM_OUTPUT_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5479 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5480 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5481 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5482 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5483
5484 Try to use function @code{asm_output_bss} defined in @file{varasm.c} when
5485 defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5486 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5487 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5488 the name, and a newline.
5489
5490 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized global
5491 variables are output. This macro exists to properly support languages like
5492 @code{c++} which do not have @code{common} data. However, this macro currently
5493 is not defined for all targets. If this macro and
5494 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} are not defined then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}
5495 or @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} or
5496 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON} is used.
5497
5498 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS
5499 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5500 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS} except takes the required alignment as a
5501 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5502 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, and gives you more flexibility in
5503 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5504 as the number of bits.
5505
5506 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5507 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro.
5508
5509 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS
5510 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5511 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}, except that it
5512 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_BSS}
5513 will be used.
5514
5515 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL
5516 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5517 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5518 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5519 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5520 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5521
5522 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5523 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5524 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5525
5526 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5527 static variables are output.
5528
5529 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL
5530 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5531 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5532 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5533 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5534 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5535 as the number of bits.
5536
5537 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL
5538 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5539 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5540 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5541 is not corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC wil use it
5542 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5543 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5544 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5545
5546
5547 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL
5548 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SHARED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5549 If defined, it is similar to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, except that it
5550 is used when @var{name} is shared. If not defined, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}
5551 will be used.
5552 @end table
5553
5554 @node Label Output
5555 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5556
5557 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5558 This is about outputting labels.
5559
5560 @table @code
5561 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL
5562 @findex assemble_name
5563 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5564 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5565 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5566 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5567 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5568 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5569
5570 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME
5571 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5572 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5573 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5574 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5575 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5576 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5577 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5578
5579 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5580 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5581
5582 @findex ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE
5583 @item ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5584 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5585 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5586 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5587 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5588 representing the function.
5589
5590 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5591
5592 @findex ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME
5593 @item ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5594 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5595 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5596 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5597 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5598 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5599
5600 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5601 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5602
5603 @findex ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL
5604 @item ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5605 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5606 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5607 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5608
5609 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5610 nothing.
5611
5612 @findex ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT
5613 @item ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5614 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5615 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5616 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5617 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5618 something about the size of the object.
5619
5620 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5621 nothing.
5622
5623 @findex ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5624 @item ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5625 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5626 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} global;
5627 that is, available for reference from other files. Use the expression
5628 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5629 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5630 for making that name global, and a newline.
5631
5632 @findex ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5633 @item ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL
5634 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5635 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5636 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5637 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5638 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5639 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5640 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5641
5642 If you don't define this macro, GCC will not support weak
5643 symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} macro.
5644
5645 @findex SUPPORTS_WEAK
5646 @item SUPPORTS_WEAK
5647 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5648
5649 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5650 definition. If @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} is defined, the default
5651 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5652 you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler flag such as
5653 @samp{-melf}.
5654
5655 @findex MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5656 @item MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY
5657 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5658 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5659 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5660 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5661 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5662 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5663
5664 @findex SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5665 @item SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5666 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5667 semantics.
5668
5669 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5670 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5671 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5672 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5673 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5674 be emitted as one-only.
5675
5676 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL
5677 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5678 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5679 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5680 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5681 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5682 declaration.
5683
5684 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5685 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5686
5687 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5688 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL (@var{stream}, @var{symref})
5689 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output on @var{stream} an assembler
5690 pseudo-op to declare a library function name external. The name of the
5691 library function is given by @var{symref}, which has type @code{rtx} and
5692 is a @code{symbol_ref}.
5693
5694 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5695 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5696
5697 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF
5698 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5699 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5700 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5701 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5702 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5703 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5704
5705 @ignore @c Seems not to exist anymore.
5706 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT
5707 @item ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF_AS_INT (@var{file}, @var{label})
5708 Define this macro for systems that use the program @code{collect2}.
5709 The definition should be a C statement to output a word containing
5710 a reference to the label @var{label}.
5711 @end ignore
5712
5713 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL
5714 @item ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5715 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a label whose
5716 name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5717
5718 It is absolutely essential that these labels be distinct from the labels
5719 used for user-level functions and variables. Otherwise, certain programs
5720 will have name conflicts with internal labels.
5721
5722 It is desirable to exclude internal labels from the symbol table of the
5723 object file. Most assemblers have a naming convention for labels that
5724 should be excluded; on many systems, the letter @samp{L} at the
5725 beginning of a label has this effect. You should find out what
5726 convention your system uses, and follow it.
5727
5728 The usual definition of this macro is as follows:
5729
5730 @example
5731 fprintf (@var{stream}, "L%s%d:\n", @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5732 @end example
5733
5734 @findex ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL
5735 @item ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5736 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5737 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5738
5739 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5740 produce the output that @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL} would produce
5741 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5742
5743 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5744 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5745 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5746 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5747 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5748 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5749 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5750
5751 @findex ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME
5752 @item ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5753 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5754 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5755 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5756 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5757
5758 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5759 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5760 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5761 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5762 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5763 internal static variables in different scopes.
5764
5765 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5766 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5767 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5768 between the name and the number will suffice.
5769
5770 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF
5771 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5772 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5773 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5774
5775 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5776 correct for most systems.
5777
5778 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS
5779 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5780 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5781 which defines (equates) the symbol whoes tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5782 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5783 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5784 the tree nodes are available.
5785
5786 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL
5787 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DEFINE_LABEL_DIFFERENCE_SYMBOL (@var{stream}, @var{symbol}, @var{high}, @var{low})
5788 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5789 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{symbol} to have a value equal to
5790 the difference of the two symbols @var{high} and @var{low}, i.e.
5791 @var{high} minus @var{low}. GCC guarantees that the symbols @var{high}
5792 and @var{low} are already known by the assembler so that the difference
5793 resolves into a constant.
5794
5795 If SET_ASM_OP is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5796 correct for most systems.
5797
5798 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS
5799 @item ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5800 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5801 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5802 @var{value}.
5803
5804 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5805 ASM_OUTPUT_DEF instead if possible.
5806
5807 @findex OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL
5808 @item OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5809 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5810 Objective C methods.
5811
5812 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5813 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5814 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5815 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5816
5817 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5818 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5819 systems define other ways of computing names.
5820
5821 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5822 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5823 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5824 50 characters extra.
5825
5826 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5827 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5828 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or NULL if the method is not
5829 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5830
5831 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5832 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5833 @end table
5834
5835 @node Initialization
5836 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5837 @cindex initialization routines
5838 @cindex termination routines
5839 @cindex constructors, output of
5840 @cindex destructors, output of
5841
5842 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5843 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5844 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5845 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5846 @code{main} is called.
5847
5848 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5849 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5850 terminates.
5851
5852 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5853 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5854 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5855 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5856
5857 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5858 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5859 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5860
5861 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5862 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5863 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5864 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5865 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5866
5867 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5868 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5869 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5870 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5871 pointer containing zero.
5872
5873 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5874 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5875 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5876 list; destructors in forward order.
5877
5878 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5879 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5880 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5881 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5882 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5883 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5884 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5885 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5886
5887 To use this method, you need appropriate definitions of the macros
5888 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}. Usually
5889 you can get them by including @file{svr4.h}.
5890
5891 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5892 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5893 support an @dfn{init} section which is executed at program startup,
5894 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5895 program is linked by the @code{gcc} driver like this:
5896
5897 @example
5898 ld -o @var{output_file} crtbegin.o @dots{} crtend.o -lgcc
5899 @end example
5900
5901 The head of a function (@code{__do_global_ctors}) appears in the init
5902 section of @file{crtbegin.o}; the remainder of the function appears in
5903 the init section of @file{crtend.o}. The linker will pull these two
5904 parts of the section together, making a whole function. If any of the
5905 user's object files linked into the middle of it contribute code, then that
5906 code will be executed as part of the body of @code{__do_global_ctors}.
5907
5908 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5909 macro properly.
5910
5911 If no init section is available, do not define
5912 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. Then @code{__do_global_ctors} is built into
5913 the text section like all other functions, and resides in
5914 @file{libgcc.a}. When GCC compiles any function called @code{main}, it
5915 inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5916 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function, also defined
5917 in @file{libgcc2.c}, simply calls @file{__do_global_ctors}.
5918
5919 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5920 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5921 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5922 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5923 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5924 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5925 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5926 the value to a ``set''; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5927 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5928 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5929 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5930 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5931 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5932 the initialization process.
5933
5934 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5935 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5936 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'. In
5937 this case, @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} does not produce an
5938 @code{N_SETT} symbol; initialization and termination functions are
5939 recognized simply by their names. This requires an extra program in the
5940 linkage step, called @code{collect2}. This program pretends to be the
5941 linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running the ordinary
5942 linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of initialization and
5943 termination functions. These functions are called via @code{__main} as
5944 described above.
5945
5946 Choosing among these configuration options has been simplified by a set
5947 of operating-system-dependent files in the @file{config} subdirectory.
5948 These files define all of the relevant parameters. Usually it is
5949 sufficient to include one into your specific machine-dependent
5950 configuration file. These files are:
5951
5952 @table @file
5953 @item aoutos.h
5954 For operating systems using the `a.out' format.
5955
5956 @item next.h
5957 For operating systems using the `MachO' format.
5958
5959 @item svr3.h
5960 For System V Release 3 and similar systems using `COFF' format.
5961
5962 @item svr4.h
5963 For System V Release 4 and similar systems using `ELF' format.
5964
5965 @item vms.h
5966 For the VMS operating system.
5967 @end table
5968
5969 @ifinfo
5970 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5971 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5972 @end ifinfo
5973
5974 @node Macros for Initialization
5975 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5976
5977 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5978 and termination functions:
5979
5980 @table @code
5981 @findex INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5982 @item INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
5983 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to identify
5984 the following data as initialization code. If not defined, GCC will
5985 assume such a section does not exist. When you are using special
5986 sections for initialization and termination functions, this macro also
5987 controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to run the
5988 initialization functions.
5989
5990 @item HAS_INIT_SECTION
5991 @findex HAS_INIT_SECTION
5992 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
5993 This macro should be defined for systems that control the contents of the
5994 init section on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
5995 be defined explicitly for systems that support
5996 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
5997
5998 @item LD_INIT_SWITCH
5999 @findex LD_INIT_SWITCH
6000 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6001 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6002
6003 @item LD_FINI_SWITCH
6004 @findex LD_FINI_SWITCH
6005 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6006 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6007
6008 @item INVOKE__main
6009 @findex INVOKE__main
6010 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6011 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6012 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6013 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6014
6015 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6016 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR
6017 Define this macro as a C statement to output on the stream @var{stream}
6018 the assembler code to arrange to call the function named @var{name} at
6019 initialization time.
6020
6021 Assume that @var{name} is the name of a C function generated
6022 automatically by the compiler. This function takes no arguments. Use
6023 the function @code{assemble_name} to output the name @var{name}; this
6024 performs any system-specific syntactic transformations such as adding an
6025 underscore.
6026
6027 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output to arrange to
6028 call the function. This is correct when the function will be called in
6029 some other manner---for example, by means of the @code{collect2} program,
6030 which looks through the symbol table to find these functions by their
6031 names.
6032
6033 @item ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6034 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR
6035 This is like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} but used for termination
6036 functions rather than initialization functions.
6037
6038 When @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR} are
6039 defined, the initializaiton routine generated for the generated object
6040 file will have static linkage.
6041 @end table
6042
6043 If your system uses @code{collect2} as the means of processing
6044 constructors, then that program normally uses @code{nm} to scan an
6045 object file for constructor functions to be called. On such systems you
6046 must not define @code{ASM_OUTPUT_CONSTRUCTOR} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DESTRUCTOR}
6047 as the object file's initialization routine must have global scope.
6048
6049 On certain kinds of systems, you can define these macros to make
6050 @code{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6051
6052 @table @code
6053 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6054 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6055 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6056 object files, so that @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6057 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6058
6059 @findex OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6060 @item OBJECT_FORMAT_ROSE
6061 Define this macro if the system uses ROSE format object files, so that
6062 @code{collect2} can assume this format and scan object files directly
6063 for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6064
6065 These macros are effective only in a native compiler; @code{collect2} as
6066 part of a cross compiler always uses @code{nm} for the target machine.
6067
6068 @findex REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6069 @item REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6070 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6071 to execute @code{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6072 @code{nm}.
6073
6074 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6075 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6076 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6077 termination functions in shared libraries:
6078
6079 @findex LDD_SUFFIX
6080 @item LDD_SUFFIX
6081 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the
6082 program which lists dynamic dependencies, like @code{"ldd"} under SunOS 4.
6083
6084 @findex PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT
6085 @item PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{PTR})
6086 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6087 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{PTR} is a variable
6088 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6089 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6090 code must advance @var{PTR} to the beginning of the filename on that
6091 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{PTR} to @code{NULL}.
6092
6093 @end table
6094
6095 @node Instruction Output
6096 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6097
6098 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6099 This describes assembler instruction output.
6100
6101 @table @code
6102 @findex REGISTER_NAMES
6103 @item REGISTER_NAMES
6104 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6105 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6106 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6107
6108 @findex ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6109 @item ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6110 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6111 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6112 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6113 to registers using alternate names.
6114
6115 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE
6116 @item ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6117 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6118 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6119
6120 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6121 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6122 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6123 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6124 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6125 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6126 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6127 so that it will not be output twice.
6128
6129 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6130 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6131 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6132 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6133 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6134
6135 @findex recog_operand
6136 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6137 elements of @code{recog_operand}.
6138
6139 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6140 in the usual way.
6141
6142 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN
6143 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6144 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6145 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6146 they will be output differently.
6147
6148 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6149 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6150 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6151 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6152 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6153 by changing the contents of the vector.
6154
6155 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6156 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6157 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6158 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6159 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6160 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6161
6162 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6163
6164 @findex FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6165 @item FINAL_PRESCAN_LABEL
6166 If defined, @code{FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN} will be called on each
6167 @code{CODE_LABEL}. In that case, @var{opvec} will be a null pointer and
6168 @var{noperands} will be zero.
6169
6170 @findex PRINT_OPERAND
6171 @item PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6172 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6173 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6174 RTL expression.
6175
6176 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6177 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6178 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6179 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6180 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6181 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6182 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6183
6184 @findex reg_names
6185 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6186 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6187 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6188 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6189
6190 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6191 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6192 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6193 @var{code}.
6194
6195 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P
6196 @item PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6197 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6198 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6199 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6200 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6201 in this way.
6202
6203 @findex PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS
6204 @item PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6205 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6206 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6207 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6208
6209 @cindex @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6210 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6211 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the macro
6212 @code{ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6213 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler Format}.
6214
6215 @findex DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND
6216 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6217 @item DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND(@var{file})
6218 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6219 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6220 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6221 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6222 or whatever.
6223
6224 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6225 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6226 explicit (e.g. with white space).
6227
6228 @findex final_sequence
6229 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6230 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence (i.e.
6231 when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6232 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6233 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6234 being output.
6235
6236 @findex REGISTER_PREFIX
6237 @findex LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6238 @findex USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6239 @findex IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6240 @findex asm_fprintf
6241 @item REGISTER_PREFIX
6242 @itemx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6243 @itemx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6244 @itemx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6245 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6246 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6247 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6248 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6249 files can define these macros differently.
6250
6251 @item ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS(@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6252 @findex ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS
6253 If defiend this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6254 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6255 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6256 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6257 statements. Noet that upper case letters are reserved for future
6258 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6259 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6260 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6261 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6262 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6263
6264 @findex ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6265 @item ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6266 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6267 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6268 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6269 first variant.
6270
6271 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6272 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}} in the output
6273 templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the first argument
6274 of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs @samp{option0},
6275 @samp{option1} or @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6276 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one or two, etc. Any special
6277 characters within these strings retain their usual meaning.
6278
6279 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6280 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6281 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6282
6283 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6284 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6285 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6286 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6287 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6288 opcodes or operand order.
6289
6290 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH
6291 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6292 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6293 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6294 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6295 profiling.
6296
6297 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP
6298 @item ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6299 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6300 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6301 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6302 profiling.
6303 @end table
6304
6305 @node Dispatch Tables
6306 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6307
6308 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6309 This concerns dispatch tables.
6310
6311 @table @code
6312 @cindex dispatch table
6313 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT
6314 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6315 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6316 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6317 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6318 definitions of these labels are output using
6319 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}, and they must be printed in the same
6320 way here. For example,
6321
6322 @example
6323 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6324 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6325 @end example
6326
6327 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6328 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GNU
6329 CC will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC.
6330 @var{body} is the body of the ADDR_DIFF_VEC; it is provided so that the
6331 mode and flags can be read.
6332
6333 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT
6334 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6335 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6336 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6337
6338 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6339 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6340 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6341 definition is output using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6342 For example,
6343
6344 @example
6345 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6346 @end example
6347
6348 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL
6349 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6350 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6351 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6352 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}; the fourth argument is the
6353 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_insn} containing an
6354 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6355
6356 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6357 for the table.
6358
6359 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6360 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL}.
6361
6362 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END
6363 @item ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6364 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6365 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6366 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6367 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6368 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6369 of the preceding label.
6370
6371 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6372 the jump-table.
6373 @end table
6374
6375 @node Exception Region Output
6376 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6377
6378 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6379
6380 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6381 region.
6382
6383 @table @code
6384 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG
6385 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_BEG ()
6386 A C expression to output text to mark the start of an exception region.
6387
6388 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6389
6390 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END
6391 @item ASM_OUTPUT_EH_REGION_END ()
6392 A C expression to output text to mark the end of an exception region.
6393
6394 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6395
6396 @findex EXCEPTION_SECTION
6397 @item EXCEPTION_SECTION ()
6398 A C expression to switch to the section in which the main
6399 exception table is to be placed (@pxref{Sections}). The default is a
6400 section named @code{.gcc_except_table} on machines that support named
6401 sections via @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SECTION_NAME}, otherwise if @samp{-fpic}
6402 or @samp{-fPIC} is in effect, the @code{data_section}, otherwise the
6403 @code{readonly_data_section}.
6404
6405 @findex EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6406 @item EH_FRAME_SECTION_ASM_OP
6407 If defined, a C string constant for the assembler operation to switch to
6408 the section for exception handling frame unwind information. If not
6409 defined, GCC will provide a default definition if the target supports
6410 named sections. @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the
6411 appropriate section.
6412
6413 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6414 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6415
6416 @findex OMIT_EH_TABLE
6417 @item OMIT_EH_TABLE ()
6418 A C expression that is nonzero if the normal exception table output
6419 should be omitted.
6420
6421 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6422
6423 @findex EH_TABLE_LOOKUP
6424 @item EH_TABLE_LOOKUP ()
6425 Alternate runtime support for looking up an exception at runtime and
6426 finding the associated handler, if the default method won't work.
6427
6428 This macro need not be defined on most platforms.
6429
6430 @findex DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6431 @item DOESNT_NEED_UNWINDER
6432 A C expression that decides whether or not the current function needs to
6433 have a function unwinder generated for it. See the file @code{except.c}
6434 for details on when to define this, and how.
6435
6436 @findex MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6437 @item MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6438 An rtx used to mask the return address found via RETURN_ADDR_RTX, so
6439 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6440
6441 @findex DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6442 @item DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6443 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6444 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6445 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6446 @samp{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either @samp{UNALIGNED_INT_ASM_OP}
6447 or @samp{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}), GCC will provide a default definition of
6448 1.
6449
6450 If this macro is defined to 1, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be the default
6451 exception handling mechanism; otherwise, setjmp/longjmp will be used by
6452 default.
6453
6454 If this macro is defined to anything, the DWARF 2 unwinder will be used
6455 instead of inline unwinders and __unwind_function in the non-setjmp case.
6456
6457 @end table
6458
6459 @node Alignment Output
6460 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6461
6462 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6463 This describes commands for alignment.
6464
6465 @table @code
6466 @findex LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER
6467 @item LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6468 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6469 a BARRIER.
6470
6471 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6472 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6473 define the macro.
6474
6475 @findex LOOP_ALIGN
6476 @item LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6477 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6478 a NOTE_INSN_LOOP_BEG note.
6479
6480 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6481 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6482 define the macro.
6483
6484 @findex LABEL_ALIGN
6485 @item LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6486 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6487 If LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER / LOOP_ALIGN specify a different alignment,
6488 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6489
6490 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP
6491 @item ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6492 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6493 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6494 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6495 expression of type @code{int}.
6496
6497 @findex ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6498 @item ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6499 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6500 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6501 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6502 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6503 section.
6504
6505 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN
6506 @item ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6507 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6508 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6509 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6510
6511 @findex ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN
6512 @item ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6513 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6514 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6515 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6516 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6517 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6518 @end table
6519
6520 @need 3000
6521 @node Debugging Info
6522 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6523
6524 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6525 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6526
6527 @menu
6528 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6529 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6530 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6531 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6532 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6533 @end menu
6534
6535 @node All Debuggers
6536 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6537
6538 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6539 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6540
6541 @table @code
6542 @findex DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER
6543 @item DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6544 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6545 register number @var{regno}. In simple cases, the value of this
6546 expression may be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are some
6547 registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6548 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in
6549 the compiler and another for DBX.
6550
6551 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6552 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6553 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6554 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6555 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6556
6557 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6558 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6559 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6560
6561 @findex DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET
6562 @item DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6563 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6564 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6565 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6566 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6567 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6568 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6569 @samp{-g} options is used.
6570
6571 @findex DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET
6572 @item DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6573 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6574 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6575 @var{offset}.
6576
6577 @findex PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6578 @item PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6579 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6580 produce when the user specifies just @samp{-g}. Define
6581 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6582 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6583 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}, and
6584 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}.
6585
6586 When the user specifies @samp{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6587 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6588 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined and
6589 @code{LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2} is not defined, GCC uses the
6590 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6591 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6592
6593 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6594 user can always get a specific type of output by using @samp{-gstabs},
6595 @samp{-gcoff}, @samp{-gdwarf-1}, @samp{-gdwarf-2}, or @samp{-gxcoff}.
6596 @end table
6597
6598 @node DBX Options
6599 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6600
6601 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6602 These are specific options for DBX output.
6603
6604 @table @code
6605 @findex DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6606 @item DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6607 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6608 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6609
6610 @findex XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6611 @item XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6612 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6613 in response to the @samp{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6614
6615 @findex DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6616 @item DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6617 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6618 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6619 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6620 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6621 if there is any occasion to.
6622
6623 @findex DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6624 @item DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6625 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6626 in the text section.
6627
6628 @findex ASM_STABS_OP
6629 @item ASM_STABS_OP
6630 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6631 @code{.stabs} to define an ordinary debugging symbol. If you don't
6632 define this macro, @code{.stabs} is used. This macro applies only to
6633 DBX debugging information format.
6634
6635 @findex ASM_STABD_OP
6636 @item ASM_STABD_OP
6637 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6638 @code{.stabd} to define a debugging symbol whose value is the current
6639 location. If you don't define this macro, @code{.stabd} is used.
6640 This macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6641
6642 @findex ASM_STABN_OP
6643 @item ASM_STABN_OP
6644 A C string constant naming the assembler pseudo op to use instead of
6645 @code{.stabn} to define a debugging symbol with no name. If you don't
6646 define this macro, @code{.stabn} is used. This macro applies only to
6647 DBX debugging information format.
6648
6649 @findex DBX_NO_XREFS
6650 @item DBX_NO_XREFS
6651 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6652 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6653 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6654 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6655
6656 @findex DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6657 @item DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6658 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6659 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6660 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6661 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6662 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6663 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6664 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6665
6666 @findex DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6667 @item DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6668 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6669 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6670 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6671 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6672 if backslash is correct for your system.
6673
6674 @findex DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6675 @item DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6676 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6677 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6678 variable.
6679
6680 @findex DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6681 @item DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6682 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6683 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6684
6685 @findex DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6686 @item DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6687 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6688 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6689 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6690
6691 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6692 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6693 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6694 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6695 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6696
6697 @findex DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6698 @item DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6699 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6700 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6701 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6702
6703 @findex DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6704 @item DBX_MEMPARM_STABS_LETTER
6705 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a stack
6706 parameter. The default is @code{'p'}.
6707
6708 @findex DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6709 @item DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6710 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6711 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6712 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6713 code.
6714
6715 @findex DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6716 @item DBX_LBRAC_FIRST
6717 Define this macro if the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol for a block should
6718 precede the debugging information for variables and functions defined in
6719 that block. Normally, in DBX format, the @code{N_LBRAC} symbol comes
6720 first.
6721
6722 @findex DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6723 @item DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6724 Define this macro if the value of a symbol describing the scope of a
6725 block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be relative to the start
6726 of the enclosing function. Normally, GNU C uses an absolute address.
6727
6728 @findex DBX_USE_BINCL
6729 @item DBX_USE_BINCL
6730 Define this macro if GNU C should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6731 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6732 macro also directs GNU C to output a type number as a pair of a file
6733 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GNU C does not
6734 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6735 number for a type number.
6736 @end table
6737
6738 @node DBX Hooks
6739 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6740
6741 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6742 These are hooks for DBX format.
6743
6744 @table @code
6745 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC
6746 @item DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6747 Define this macro to say how to output to @var{stream} the debugging
6748 information for the start of a scope level for variable names. The
6749 argument @var{name} is the name of an assembler symbol (for use with
6750 @code{assemble_name}) whose value is the address where the scope begins.
6751
6752 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC
6753 @item DBX_OUTPUT_RBRAC (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6754 Like @code{DBX_OUTPUT_LBRAC}, but for the end of a scope level.
6755
6756 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM
6757 @item DBX_OUTPUT_ENUM (@var{stream}, @var{type})
6758 Define this macro if the target machine requires special handling to
6759 output an enumeration type. The definition should be a C statement
6760 (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information to @var{stream}
6761 for the type @var{type}.
6762
6763 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END
6764 @item DBX_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_END (@var{stream}, @var{function})
6765 Define this macro if the target machine requires special output at the
6766 end of the debugging information for a function. The definition should
6767 be a C statement (sans semicolon) to output the appropriate information
6768 to @var{stream}. @var{function} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node for
6769 the function.
6770
6771 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES
6772 @item DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES (@var{syms})
6773 Define this macro if you need to control the order of output of the
6774 standard data types at the beginning of compilation. The argument
6775 @var{syms} is a @code{tree} which is a chain of all the predefined
6776 global symbols, including names of data types.
6777
6778 Normally, DBX output starts with definitions of the types for integers
6779 and characters, followed by all the other predefined types of the
6780 particular language in no particular order.
6781
6782 On some machines, it is necessary to output different particular types
6783 first. To do this, define @code{DBX_OUTPUT_STANDARD_TYPES} to output
6784 those symbols in the necessary order. Any predefined types that you
6785 don't explicitly output will be output afterward in no particular order.
6786
6787 Be careful not to define this macro so that it works only for C. There
6788 are no global variables to access most of the built-in types, because
6789 another language may have another set of types. The way to output a
6790 particular type is to look through @var{syms} to see if you can find it.
6791 Here is an example:
6792
6793 @smallexample
6794 @{
6795 tree decl;
6796 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6797 if (!strcmp (IDENTIFIER_POINTER (DECL_NAME (decl)),
6798 "long int"))
6799 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6800 @dots{}
6801 @}
6802 @end smallexample
6803
6804 @noindent
6805 This does nothing if the expected type does not exist.
6806
6807 See the function @code{init_decl_processing} in @file{c-decl.c} to find
6808 the names to use for all the built-in C types.
6809
6810 Here is another way of finding a particular type:
6811
6812 @c this is still overfull. --mew 10feb93
6813 @smallexample
6814 @{
6815 tree decl;
6816 for (decl = syms; decl; decl = TREE_CHAIN (decl))
6817 if (TREE_CODE (decl) == TYPE_DECL
6818 && (TREE_CODE (TREE_TYPE (decl))
6819 == INTEGER_CST)
6820 && TYPE_PRECISION (TREE_TYPE (decl)) == 16
6821 && TYPE_UNSIGNED (TREE_TYPE (decl)))
6822 @group
6823 /* @r{This must be @code{unsigned short}.} */
6824 dbxout_symbol (decl);
6825 @dots{}
6826 @}
6827 @end group
6828 @end smallexample
6829
6830 @findex NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6831 @item NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6832 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6833 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extention construct.
6834 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6835 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6836
6837 @end table
6838
6839 @node File Names and DBX
6840 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6841
6842 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6843 This describes file names in DBX format.
6844
6845 @table @code
6846 @findex DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6847 @item DBX_WORKING_DIRECTORY
6848 Define this if DBX wants to have the current directory recorded in each
6849 object file.
6850
6851 Note that the working directory is always recorded if GDB extensions are
6852 enabled.
6853
6854 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME
6855 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6856 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6857 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6858 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6859 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6860
6861 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6862 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6863
6864 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6865 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6866 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6867 @var{stream} which indicates that the current directory during
6868 compilation is named @var{name}.
6869
6870 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6871 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6872
6873 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6874 @item DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6875 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6876 compilation of the main source file @var{name}.
6877
6878 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6879 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6880
6881 @findex DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
6882 @item DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6883 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6884 @var{stream} which indicates that file @var{name} is the current source
6885 file. This output is generated each time input shifts to a different
6886 source file as a result of @samp{#include}, the end of an included file,
6887 or a @samp{#line} command.
6888
6889 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6890 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6891 @end table
6892
6893 @need 2000
6894 @node SDB and DWARF
6895 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6896
6897 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6898 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6899
6900 @table @code
6901 @findex SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6902 @item SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6903 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6904 for SDB in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6905
6906 @findex DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6907 @item DWARF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6908 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf format debugging output
6909 in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6910
6911 @findex DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6912 @item DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6913 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6914 debugging output in response to the @samp{-g} option.
6915
6916 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6917 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6918 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6919 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6920 as appropriate from @code{FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6921
6922 @findex DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6923 @item DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6924 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6925 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}
6926 (@pxref{Exception Region Output} is nonzero, GCC will output this
6927 information not matter how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6928
6929 @findex LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6930 @item LINKER_DOES_NOT_WORK_WITH_DWARF2
6931 Define this macro if the linker does not work with Dwarf version 2.
6932 Normally, if the user specifies only @samp{-ggdb} GCC will use Dwarf
6933 version 2 if available; this macro disables this. See the description
6934 of the @code{PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE} macro for more details.
6935
6936 @findex DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
6937 @item DWARF2_GENERATE_TEXT_SECTION_LABEL
6938 By default, the Dwarf 2 debugging information generator will generate a
6939 label to mark the beginning of the text section. If it is better simply
6940 to use the name of the text section itself, rather than an explicit label,
6941 to indicate the beginning of the text section, define this macro to zero.
6942
6943 @findex DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6944 @item DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6945 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6946 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6947 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6948
6949 @findex PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6950 @item PUT_SDB_@dots{}
6951 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
6952 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
6953 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
6954 not define them yourself.
6955
6956 @findex SDB_DELIM
6957 @item SDB_DELIM
6958 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
6959 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
6960 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
6961 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
6962 required.
6963
6964 @findex SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6965 @item SDB_GENERATE_FAKE
6966 Define this macro to override the usual method of constructing a dummy
6967 name for anonymous structure and union types. See @file{sdbout.c} for
6968 more information.
6969
6970 @findex SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6971 @item SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
6972 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
6973 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
6974 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
6975 it.
6976
6977 @findex SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6978 @item SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
6979 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
6980 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
6981 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
6982 @end table
6983
6984 @node Cross-compilation
6985 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
6986 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
6987 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
6988
6989 While all modern machines use 2's complement representation for integers,
6990 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
6991 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
6992 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
6993 doing the compilation.
6994
6995 @findex atof
6996 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
6997 range and precision, the cross compiler cannot safely use the host
6998 machine's floating point arithmetic. Therefore, floating point constants
6999 must be represented in the target machine's format. This means that the
7000 cross compiler cannot use @code{atof} to parse a floating point constant;
7001 it must have its own special routine to use instead. Also, constant
7002 folding must emulate the target machine's arithmetic (or must not be done
7003 at all).
7004
7005 The macros in the following table should be defined only if you are cross
7006 compiling between different floating point formats.
7007
7008 Otherwise, don't define them. Then default definitions will be set up which
7009 use @code{double} as the data type, @code{==} to test for equality, etc.
7010
7011 You don't need to worry about how many times you use an operand of any
7012 of these macros. The compiler never uses operands which have side effects.
7013
7014 @table @code
7015 @findex REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7016 @item REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7017 A macro for the C data type to be used to hold a floating point value
7018 in the target machine's format. Typically this would be a
7019 @code{struct} containing an array of @code{int}.
7020
7021 @findex REAL_VALUES_EQUAL
7022 @item REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (@var{x}, @var{y})
7023 A macro for a C expression which compares for equality the two values,
7024 @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7025
7026 @findex REAL_VALUES_LESS
7027 @item REAL_VALUES_LESS (@var{x}, @var{y})
7028 A macro for a C expression which tests whether @var{x} is less than
7029 @var{y}, both values being of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and
7030 interpreted as floating point numbers in the target machine's
7031 representation.
7032
7033 @findex REAL_VALUE_LDEXP
7034 @findex ldexp
7035 @item REAL_VALUE_LDEXP (@var{x}, @var{scale})
7036 A macro for a C expression which performs the standard library
7037 function @code{ldexp}, but using the target machine's floating point
7038 representation. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression have
7039 type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}. The second argument, @var{scale}, is an
7040 integer.
7041
7042 @findex REAL_VALUE_FIX
7043 @item REAL_VALUE_FIX (@var{x})
7044 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7045 floating point value @var{x} to a signed integer. @var{x} has type
7046 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7047
7048 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX
7049 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (@var{x})
7050 A macro whose definition is a C expression to convert the target-machine
7051 floating point value @var{x} to an unsigned integer. @var{x} has type
7052 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7053
7054 @findex REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT
7055 @item REAL_VALUE_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7056 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7057 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an integer value (but still
7058 as a floating point number). @var{x} has type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE},
7059 and so does the value.
7060
7061 @findex REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT
7062 @item REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_RNDZINT (@var{x})
7063 A macro whose definition is a C expression to round the target-machine
7064 floating point value @var{x} towards zero to an unsigned integer value
7065 (but still represented as a floating point number). @var{x} has type
7066 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, and so does the value.
7067
7068 @findex REAL_VALUE_ATOF
7069 @item REAL_VALUE_ATOF (@var{string}, @var{mode})
7070 A macro for a C expression which converts @var{string}, an expression of
7071 type @code{char *}, into a floating point number in the target machine's
7072 representation for mode @var{mode}. The value has type
7073 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7074
7075 @findex REAL_INFINITY
7076 @item REAL_INFINITY
7077 Define this macro if infinity is a possible floating point value, and
7078 therefore division by 0 is legitimate.
7079
7080 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISINF
7081 @findex isinf
7082 @item REAL_VALUE_ISINF (@var{x})
7083 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7084 point value, is infinity. The value has type @code{int}.
7085 By default, this is defined to call @code{isinf}.
7086
7087 @findex REAL_VALUE_ISNAN
7088 @findex isnan
7089 @item REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (@var{x})
7090 A macro for a C expression which determines whether @var{x}, a floating
7091 point value, is a ``nan'' (not-a-number). The value has type
7092 @code{int}. By default, this is defined to call @code{isnan}.
7093 @end table
7094
7095 @cindex constant folding and floating point
7096 Define the following additional macros if you want to make floating
7097 point constant folding work while cross compiling. If you don't
7098 define them, cross compilation is still possible, but constant folding
7099 will not happen for floating point values.
7100
7101 @table @code
7102 @findex REAL_ARITHMETIC
7103 @item REAL_ARITHMETIC (@var{output}, @var{code}, @var{x}, @var{y})
7104 A macro for a C statement which calculates an arithmetic operation of
7105 the two floating point values @var{x} and @var{y}, both of type
7106 @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} in the target machine's representation, to
7107 produce a result of the same type and representation which is stored
7108 in @var{output} (which will be a variable).
7109
7110 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}, a tree code
7111 which will always be one of the following: @code{PLUS_EXPR},
7112 @code{MINUS_EXPR}, @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR},
7113 @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.@refill
7114
7115 @cindex overflow while constant folding
7116 The expansion of this macro is responsible for checking for overflow.
7117 If overflow happens, the macro expansion should execute the statement
7118 @code{return 0;}, which indicates the inability to perform the
7119 arithmetic operation requested.
7120
7121 @findex REAL_VALUE_NEGATE
7122 @item REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (@var{x})
7123 A macro for a C expression which returns the negative of the floating
7124 point value @var{x}. Both @var{x} and the value of the expression
7125 have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} and are in the target machine's
7126 floating point representation.
7127
7128 There is no way for this macro to report overflow, since overflow
7129 can't happen in the negation operation.
7130
7131 @findex REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE
7132 @item REAL_VALUE_TRUNCATE (@var{mode}, @var{x})
7133 A macro for a C expression which converts the floating point value
7134 @var{x} to mode @var{mode}.
7135
7136 Both @var{x} and the value of the expression are in the target machine's
7137 floating point representation and have type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7138 However, the value should have an appropriate bit pattern to be output
7139 properly as a floating constant whose precision accords with mode
7140 @var{mode}.
7141
7142 There is no way for this macro to report overflow.
7143
7144 @findex REAL_VALUE_TO_INT
7145 @item REAL_VALUE_TO_INT (@var{low}, @var{high}, @var{x})
7146 A macro for a C expression which converts a floating point value
7147 @var{x} into a double-precision integer which is then stored into
7148 @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int}.
7149
7150 @item REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT (@var{x}, @var{low}, @var{high}, @var{mode})
7151 @findex REAL_VALUE_FROM_INT
7152 A macro for a C expression which converts a double-precision integer
7153 found in @var{low} and @var{high}, two variables of type @var{int},
7154 into a floating point value which is then stored into @var{x}.
7155 The value is in the target machine's representation for mode @var{mode}
7156 and has the type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}.
7157 @end table
7158
7159 @node Misc
7160 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7161 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7162
7163 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7164 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7165
7166 @table @code
7167 @item PREDICATE_CODES
7168 @findex PREDICATE_CODES
7169 Define this if you have defined special-purpose predicates in the file
7170 @file{@var{machine}.c}. This macro is called within an initializer of an
7171 array of structures. The first field in the structure is the name of a
7172 predicate and the second field is an array of rtl codes. For each
7173 predicate, list all rtl codes that can be in expressions matched by the
7174 predicate. The list should have a trailing comma. Here is an example
7175 of two entries in the list for a typical RISC machine:
7176
7177 @smallexample
7178 #define PREDICATE_CODES \
7179 @{"gen_reg_rtx_operand", @{SUBREG, REG@}@}, \
7180 @{"reg_or_short_cint_operand", @{SUBREG, REG, CONST_INT@}@},
7181 @end smallexample
7182
7183 Defining this macro does not affect the generated code (however,
7184 incorrect definitions that omit an rtl code that may be matched by the
7185 predicate can cause the compiler to malfunction). Instead, it allows
7186 the table built by @file{genrecog} to be more compact and efficient,
7187 thus speeding up the compiler. The most important predicates to include
7188 in the list specified by this macro are those used in the most insn
7189 patterns.
7190
7191 @findex CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7192 @item CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7193 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7194 elements of a jump-table should have.
7195
7196 @findex CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE
7197 @item CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7198 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7199 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7200 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7201 To make this work, you also have to define INSN_ALIGN and
7202 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7203 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7204 flags can be updated.
7205
7206 @findex CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7207 @item CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7208 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7209 should contain relative addresses. If jump-tables never contain
7210 relative addresses, then you need not define this macro.
7211
7212 @findex CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7213 @item CASE_DROPS_THROUGH
7214 Define this if control falls through a @code{case} insn when the index
7215 value is out of range. This means the specified default-label is
7216 actually ignored by the @code{case} insn proper.
7217
7218 @findex CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7219 @item CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7220 Define this to be the smallest number of different values for which it
7221 is best to use a jump-table instead of a tree of conditional branches.
7222 The default is four for machines with a @code{casesi} instruction and
7223 five otherwise. This is best for most machines.
7224
7225 @findex WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7226 @item WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7227 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7228 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7229 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7230
7231 @findex LOAD_EXTEND_OP
7232 @item LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mode})
7233 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7234 memory in @var{mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7235 bits outside of @var{mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7236 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7237 of @var{mode} for which the
7238 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7239 @code{NIL} for other modes.
7240
7241 This macro is not called with @var{mode} non-integral or with a width
7242 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7243 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7244 @code{NIL}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7245 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7246
7247 @findex SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7248 @item SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7249 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7250 extends.
7251
7252 @findex IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7253 @item IMPLICIT_FIX_EXPR
7254 An alias for a tree code that should be used by default for conversion
7255 of floating point values to fixed point. Normally,
7256 @code{FIX_ROUND_EXPR} is used.@refill
7257
7258 @findex FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7259 @item FIXUNS_TRUNC_LIKE_FIX_TRUNC
7260 Define this macro if the same instructions that convert a floating
7261 point number to a signed fixed point number also convert validly to an
7262 unsigned one.
7263
7264 @findex EASY_DIV_EXPR
7265 @item EASY_DIV_EXPR
7266 An alias for a tree code that is the easiest kind of division to
7267 compile code for in the general case. It may be
7268 @code{TRUNC_DIV_EXPR}, @code{FLOOR_DIV_EXPR}, @code{CEIL_DIV_EXPR} or
7269 @code{ROUND_DIV_EXPR}. These four division operators differ in how
7270 they round the result to an integer. @code{EASY_DIV_EXPR} is used
7271 when it is permissible to use any of those kinds of division and the
7272 choice should be made on the basis of efficiency.@refill
7273
7274 @findex MOVE_MAX
7275 @item MOVE_MAX
7276 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7277 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7278
7279 @findex MAX_MOVE_MAX
7280 @item MAX_MOVE_MAX
7281 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7282 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7283 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7284 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7285 at run-time.
7286
7287 @findex SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7288 @item SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7289 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7290 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7291 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7292 this macro is non-zero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7293 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7294 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7295 instructions that act on bitfields at variable positions, which may
7296 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7297 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7298 arguments to bitfield instructions.
7299
7300 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7301 position (for bitfield operations), or if no variable-position bitfield
7302 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7303
7304 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7305 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7306 bitfield operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7307 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7308 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7309
7310 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7311
7312 @findex TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION
7313 @item TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7314 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7315 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7316 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7317 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7318
7319 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7320
7321 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7322 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7323 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7324 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7325 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7326 such cases may improve things.
7327
7328 @findex STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7329 @item STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7330 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7331 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7332 (@samp{s@var{cond}}) when the condition is true. This description must
7333 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{s@var{cond}} patterns and all the
7334 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7335
7336 A value of 1 or -1 means that the instruction implementing the
7337 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or -1 when the comparison is true
7338 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7339 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7340 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7341 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7342 @samp{s@var{cond}} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7343 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7344 the compiler.
7345
7346 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or -1, the compiler will
7347 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7348 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7349 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7350 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7351 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7352 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7353 expression
7354
7355 @smallexample
7356 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7357 @end smallexample
7358
7359 @noindent
7360 can be converted to
7361
7362 @smallexample
7363 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7364 @end smallexample
7365
7366 @noindent
7367 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7368 tested into the sign bit.
7369
7370 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7371 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7372 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7373 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7374 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7375 comparison operators and let us know
7376 @ifset USING
7377 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs}).
7378 @end ifset
7379 @ifclear USING
7380 (@pxref{Bug Reporting,,How to Report Bugs,gcc.info,Using GCC}).
7381 @end ifclear
7382
7383 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7384 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7385 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7386 to be used:
7387
7388 @itemize @bullet
7389 @item
7390 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7391 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7392 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7393 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7394 combine the normalization with other operations.
7395
7396 @item
7397 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or -1, with -1 being
7398 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7399 other machines.
7400
7401 @item
7402 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7403 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7404 others.
7405
7406 @item
7407 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7408 @end itemize
7409
7410 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7411 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7412 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7413 those cases, e.g., one matching
7414
7415 @smallexample
7416 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7417 @end smallexample
7418
7419 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7420 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7421 @samp{s@var{cond}} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7422 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7423 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7424 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7425 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptizer can be used to
7426 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7427
7428 You need not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7429 instructions.
7430
7431 @findex FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7432 @item FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7433 A C expression that gives a non-zero floating point value that is
7434 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7435 Define this macro on machine that have comparison operations that return
7436 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7437 this macro.
7438
7439 @findex Pmode
7440 @item Pmode
7441 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7442 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7443 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7444 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7445 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7446
7447 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7448 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7449 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7450 to @code{Pmode}.
7451
7452 @findex FUNCTION_MODE
7453 @item FUNCTION_MODE
7454 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7455 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most machines this
7456 should be @code{QImode}.
7457
7458 @findex INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD
7459 @item INTEGRATE_THRESHOLD (@var{decl})
7460 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions above which the
7461 function @var{decl} should not be inlined. @var{decl} is a
7462 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} node.
7463
7464 The default definition of this macro is 64 plus 8 times the number of
7465 arguments that the function accepts. Some people think a larger
7466 threshold should be used on RISC machines.
7467
7468 @findex SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7469 @item SCCS_DIRECTIVE
7470 Define this if the preprocessor should ignore @code{#sccs} directives
7471 and print no error message.
7472
7473 @findex NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7474 @item NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7475 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C.
7476 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7477 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7478 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7479
7480 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA
7481 @findex #pragma
7482 @findex pragma
7483 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA (@var{getc}, @var{ungetc}, @var{name})
7484 Define this macro if you want to implement any pragmas. If defined, it
7485 is a C expression whose value is 1 if the pragma was handled by the
7486 macro, zero otherwise. The argument @var{getc} is a function of type
7487 @samp{int (*)(void)} which will return the next character in the input
7488 stream, or EOF if no characters are left. The argument @var{ungetc} is
7489 a function of type @samp{void (*)(int)} which will push a character back
7490 into the input stream. The argument @var{name} is the word following
7491 #pragma in the input stream. The input stream pointer will be pointing
7492 just beyond the end of this word. The input stream should be left
7493 undistrubed if the expression returns zero, otherwise it should be
7494 pointing at the next character after the end of the pragma. Any
7495 characters remaining on the line will be ignored.
7496
7497 It is generally a bad idea to implement new uses of @code{#pragma}. The
7498 only reason to define this macro is for compatibility with other
7499 compilers that do support @code{#pragma} for the sake of any user
7500 programs which already use it.
7501
7502 If the pragma can be implemented by atttributes then the macro
7503 @samp{INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} might be a useful one to define as well.
7504
7505 Note: older versions of this macro only had two arguments: @var{stream}
7506 and @var{token}. The macro was changed in order to allow it to work
7507 when gcc is built both with and without a cpp library.
7508
7509 @findex HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7510 @findex #pragma
7511 @findex pragma
7512 @item HANDLE_SYSV_PRAGMA
7513 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want the System V style
7514 pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(<n>)} and @samp{#pragma weak <name>
7515 [=<value>]} to be supported by gcc.
7516
7517 The pack pragma specifies the maximum alignment (in bytes) of fields
7518 within a structure, in much the same way as the @samp{__aligned__} and
7519 @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A pack value of zero resets
7520 the behaviour to the default.
7521
7522 The weak pragma only works if @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK} and
7523 @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} are defined. If enabled it allows the creation
7524 of specifically named weak labels, optionally with a value.
7525
7526 @findex HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7527 @findex #pragma
7528 @findex pragma
7529 @item HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_PUSH_POP
7530 Define this macro (to a value of 1) if you want to support the Win32
7531 style pragmas @samp{#pragma pack(push,<n>)} and @samp{#pragma
7532 pack(pop)}. The pack(push,<n>) pragma specifies the maximum alignment
7533 (in bytes) of fields within a structure, in much the same way as the
7534 @samp{__aligned__} and @samp{__packed__} @code{__attribute__}s do. A
7535 pack value of zero resets the behaviour to the default. Successive
7536 invocations of this pragma cause the previous values to be stacked, so
7537 that invocations of @samp{#pragma pack(pop)} will return to the previous
7538 value.
7539
7540 @findex VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE
7541 @item VALID_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTE (@var{decl}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7542 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7543 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{decl}.
7544 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{decl}.
7545
7546 @findex VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE
7547 @item VALID_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTE (@var{type}, @var{attributes}, @var{identifier}, @var{args})
7548 If defined, a C expression whose value is nonzero if @var{identifier} with
7549 arguments @var{args} is a valid machine specific attribute for @var{type}.
7550 The attributes in @var{attributes} have previously been assigned to @var{type}.
7551
7552 @findex COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7553 @item COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7554 If defined, a C expression whose value is zero if the attributes on
7555 @var{type1} and @var{type2} are incompatible, one if they are compatible,
7556 and two if they are nearly compatible (which causes a warning to be
7557 generated).
7558
7559 @findex SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7560 @item SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type})
7561 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7562 newly defined @var{type}.
7563
7564 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7565 @item MERGE_MACHINE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES (@var{type1}, @var{type2})
7566 Define this macro if the merging of type attributes needs special handling.
7567 If defined, the result is a list of the combined TYPE_ATTRIBUTES of
7568 @var{type1} and @var{type2}. It is assumed that comptypes has already been
7569 called and returned 1.
7570
7571 @findex MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7572 @item MERGE_MACHINE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{olddecl}, @var{newdecl})
7573 Define this macro if the merging of decl attributes needs special handling.
7574 If defined, the result is a list of the combined DECL_MACHINE_ATTRIBUTES of
7575 @var{olddecl} and @var{newdecl}. @var{newdecl} is a duplicate declaration
7576 of @var{olddecl}. Examples of when this is needed are when one attribute
7577 overrides another, or when an attribute is nullified by a subsequent
7578 definition.
7579
7580 @findex INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7581 @item INSERT_ATTRIBUTES (@var{node}, @var{attr_ptr}, @var{prefix_ptr})
7582 Define this macro if you want to be able to add attributes to a decl
7583 when it is being created. This is normally useful for backends which
7584 wish to implement a pragma by using the attributes which correspond to
7585 the pragma's effect. The @var{node} argument is the decl which is being
7586 created. The @var{attr_ptr} argument is a pointer to the attribute list
7587 for this decl. The @var{prefix_ptr} is a pointer to the list of
7588 attributes that have appeared after the specifiers and modifiers of the
7589 declaration, but before the declaration proper.
7590
7591 @findex SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7592 @item SET_DEFAULT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES (@var{decl}, @var{attributes})
7593 If defined, a C statement that assigns default attributes to
7594 newly defined @var{decl}.
7595
7596 @findex DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7597 @item DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7598 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in identifier
7599 names. 0 means @samp{$} is not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed.
7600 1 is the default; there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7601 This macro controls the compiler proper; it does not affect the preprocessor.
7602
7603 @findex NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7604 @item NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
7605 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7606 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
7607 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
7608 @samp{.} is used instead.
7609
7610 @findex NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7611 @item NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
7612 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
7613 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
7614 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
7615 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
7616
7617 @findex DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7618 @item DEFAULT_MAIN_RETURN
7619 Define this macro if the target system expects every program's @code{main}
7620 function to return a standard ``success'' value by default (if no other
7621 value is explicitly returned).
7622
7623 The definition should be a C statement (sans semicolon) to generate the
7624 appropriate rtl instructions. It is used only when compiling the end of
7625 @code{main}.
7626
7627 @item HAVE_ATEXIT
7628 @findex HAVE_ATEXIT
7629 Define this if the target system supports the function
7630 @code{atexit} from the ANSI C standard. If this is not defined,
7631 and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} is not defined, a default
7632 @code{exit} function will be provided to support C++.
7633
7634 @item EXIT_BODY
7635 @findex EXIT_BODY
7636 Define this if your @code{exit} function needs to do something
7637 besides calling an external function @code{_cleanup} before
7638 terminating with @code{_exit}. The @code{EXIT_BODY} macro is
7639 only needed if neither @code{HAVE_ATEXIT} nor
7640 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} are defined.
7641
7642 @findex INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED
7643 @item INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7644 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7645 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7646 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7647 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7648 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7649 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7650 you should define this macro.
7651
7652 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7653
7654 @findex INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED
7655 @item INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7656 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7657 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7658 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7659 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7660 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7661 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7662 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7663 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7664 slot of @var{insn}.
7665
7666 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7667
7668 @findex MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7669 @item MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG (@var{insn})
7670 In rare cases, correct code generation requires extra machine
7671 dependent processing between the second jump optimization pass and
7672 delayed branch scheduling. On those machines, define this macro as a C
7673 statement to act on the code starting at @var{insn}.
7674
7675 @findex MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7676 @item MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7677 Define this macro if in some cases global symbols from one translation
7678 unit may not be bound to undefined symbols in another translation unit
7679 without user intervention. For instance, under Microsoft Windows
7680 symbols must be explicitly imported from shared libraries (DLLs).
7681
7682 @findex ISSUE_RATE
7683 @item ISSUE_RATE
7684 A C expression that returns how many instructions can be issued at the
7685 same time if the machine is a superscalar machine. This is only used by
7686 the @samp{Haifa} scheduler, and not the traditional scheduler.
7687
7688 @findex MD_SCHED_INIT
7689 @item MD_SCHED_INIT (@var{file}, @var{verbose})
7690 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler at the
7691 beginning of each block of instructions that are to be scheduled.
7692 @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio stream to write any
7693 debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level provided by
7694 @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7695
7696 @findex MD_SCHED_REORDER
7697 @item MD_SCHED_REORDER (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{ready}, @var{n_ready},
7698 @var{clock}, @var{can_issue_more})
7699 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7700 has scheduled the ready list to allow the machine description to reorder
7701 it (for example to combine two small instructions together on
7702 @samp{VLIW} machines). @var{file} is either a null pointer, or a stdio
7703 stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose} is the verbose level
7704 provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}. @var{ready} is a pointer to
7705 the ready list of instructions that are ready to be scheduled.
7706 @var{n_ready} is the number of elements in the ready list. The
7707 scheduler reads the ready list in reverse order, starting with
7708 @var{ready}[@var{n_ready}-1] and going to @var{ready}[0]. @var{clock}
7709 is the timer tick of the scheduler. @var{can_issue_more} is an output
7710 parameter that is set to the number of insns that can issue this clock;
7711 normally this is just @code{issue_rate}.
7712
7713 @findex MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
7714 @item MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE (@var{file}, @var{verbose}, @var{insn}, @var{more})
7715 A C statement which is executed by the @samp{Haifa} scheduler after it
7716 has scheduled an insn from the ready list. @var{file} is either a null
7717 pointer, or a stdio stream to write any debug output to. @var{verbose}
7718 is the verbose level provided by @samp{-fsched-verbose-}@var{n}.
7719 @var{insn} is the instruction that was scheduled. @var{more} is the
7720 number of instructions that can be issued in the current cycle. The
7721 @samp{MD_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE} macro is responsible for updating the
7722 value of @var{more} (typically by @var{more}--).
7723
7724 @findex MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7725 @item MAX_INTEGER_COMPUTATION_MODE
7726 Define this to the largest integer machine mode which can be used for
7727 operations other than load, store and copy operations.
7728
7729 You need only define this macro if the target holds values larger than
7730 @code{word_mode} in general purpose registers. Most targets should not define
7731 this macro.
7732
7733 @findex MATH_LIBRARY
7734 @item MATH_LIBRARY
7735 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7736 in the system math library, or @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7737 separate math library.
7738
7739 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"-lm"} is wrong.
7740 @end table
This page took 0.393205 seconds and 5 git commands to generate.